CB 160 Manual de Servicio PDF

SHOP MANUAL
CB HORNET 160R
CB HORNET 160R
A Few Words About Safety
Service information
The service and repair information contained in this manual is intended for use by qualified, professional technicians.
Attempting service or repairs without the proper training, tools, and equipment could cause injury to you or others. It could also damage
the vehicle or create an unsafe condition.
This manual describes the proper methods and procedures for performing service, maintenance, and repairs. Some procedures require
the use of specially designed tools and dedicated equipment. Any person who intends to use a replacement part, service procedure
or a tool that is not recommended by Honda, must determine the risks to their personal safety and the safe operation of the vehicle.
If you need to replace a part, use genuine Honda parts with the correct part number or an equivalent part. We strongly recommended
that you do not use replacement parts of inferior quality.
For Your Customer’s Safety

Proper service and maintenance are essential to the customer’s safety and
the reliability of the vehicle. Any error or oversight while servicing a vehicle Improper service or repairs can create an unsafe
can result in faulty operation, damage to the vehicle, or injury to others. condition that can cause your customer or others to be
seriously hurt or killed.
For Your Safety Follow the procedures and precautions in this manual
Because this manual is intended for the professional service technician, and other service materials carefully.
we do not provide warnings about many basic shop safety practices
(e.g,.Hot parts – wear gloves). If you have not received shop safety training
or do not feel confident about your knowledge of safe servicing practice,
we recommended that you do not attempt to perform the procedures
described in this manual.
Failure to properly follow instructions and precautions
Some of the most important general service safety precautions are given can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
below. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can
arise in performing service and repair procedures. Only you can decide Follow the procedures and precautions in this manual
whether or not you should perform a given task. carefully.
Important Safety Precautions

Make sure you have a clear understanding of all basic shop safety practices and that you are wearing appropriate clothing and using
safety equipment. When performing any service task, be especially careful of the following:
• Read all of the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools, the replacement or repair parts, and the skills required
to perform the tasks safely and completely.
• Protect your eyes by using proper safety glasses, goggles or face shields any time you hammer, drill, grind, pry or work around
pressurized air or liquids, and springs or other stored-energy components. If there is any doubt, put on eye protection.
• Use other protective wear when necessary, for example gloves or safety shoes. Handling hot or sharp parts can cause severe burns
or cuts. Before you grab something that looks like it can hurt you, stop and put on gloves.
• Protect yourself and others whenever you have the vehicle up in the air. Any time you lift the vehicle, either with a hoist or a jack,
make sure that it is always securely supported. Use jack stands.
Make sure the engine is off before you begin any servicing procedures, unless the instruction tells you to do otherwise.
This will help eliminate several potential hazards:
• Carbon monoxide poisoning from engine exhaust. Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you run the engine.
• Burns from hot parts or coolant. Let the engine and exhaust system cool before working in those areas.
• Injury from moving parts. If the instruction tells you to run the engine, be sure your hands, fingers and clothing are out of the way.
Gasoline vapors and hydrogen gases from batteries are explosive. To reduce the possibility of a fire or explosion, be careful when
working around gasoline or batteries.
• Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline, to clean parts.

• Never drain or store gasoline in an open container.
• Keep all cigarettes sparks and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL CONTENTS
This service manual describes the service procedures for the
CBF160MG.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule (Section 3) recommendations
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
to ensure that the vehicle is in peak operating condition.
Performing the first scheduled maintenance is very important. FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM 2
It compensates for the initial wear that occurs during the
break-in period.
Sections 1 and 3 apply to the whole vehicle. Section 2 illustrates
MAINTENANCE 3
procedures for removal/installation of components that may be
required to perform service described in the following sections. LUBRICATION SYSTEM 4
Section 4 through 18 describe parts of the vehicle, grouped
according to location.
Find the section you want on this page, then turn to the table
FUEL SYSTEM 5
of contents on the first page of the section.
Most sections start with an assembly or system illustration,
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 6
service information and troubleshooting for the section. The
ENGINE
subsequent pages give detailed procedures.
If you don’t know the source of the trouble, go to section 20
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES 7
Troubleshooting.
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To
CYLINDER/PISTON 8
help you make informed decisions we have provided safety
messages and other information throughout this manual. CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE 9
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about
all the hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.
ALTERNATOR 10
You will find important safety information in a variety of
forms including: CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER 11
• Safety Labels – on the vehicle
• Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING 12
CHASSIS
and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or

CAUTION. These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION 13
if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT
BRAKE SYSTEM 14
if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM 15
ELECTRICAL
• Instructions– How to service this vehicle correctly and

safely.
IGNITION SYSTEM 16
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a symbol. The purpose of this message is
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES 17
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
Some information provided in this manual is applicable for ID
ELECTRIC STARTER SYSTEM 18
type model only.
ALL INFORMATION, ILLUSTRATIONS, DIRECTIONS
WIRING DIAGRAM 19
A N D S P E C I F I C AT I O N S I N C L U D E D I N T H I S
PUBLICATION ARE BASED ON THE LATEST PRODUCT
INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF APPROVAL
TROUBLESHOOTING 20
FOR PRINTING. HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD. RESERVES
THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES AT ANY TIME
WITHOUT NOTICE AND WITHOUT INCURRING ANY
INDEX 21
OBLIGATION WHATEVER. NO PART OF THIS
PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT
WRITTEN PERMISSION. THIS MANUAL IS WRITTEN
FOR PERSONS WHO HAVE ACQUIRED BASIC
KNOWLEDGE OF MAINTENANCE ON HONDA
MOTORCYCLES, MOTOR SCOOTERS OR ATVS.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
SERVICE PUBLICATION OFFICE
Month of Issue: November, 2015
© Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
SYMBOLS
The symbols used throughout this manual show specific service procedures. If supplementary information is required pertaining to these
symbols, it would be explained specifically in the text without the use of the symbols.
Replace the part(s) with new one(s) before assembly.
Use recommended engine oil, unless otherwise specified.
Use molybdenum oil solution (mixture of the engine oil and molybdenum grease in a ratio of 1:1).
Use multi-purpose grease (Lithium based multi-purpose grease NLGI #2 or equivalent).
Use water resistant multi-purpose grease (Shell Alvania EP2 or Excelite EP2 (KYODO YUSHI CO. LTD)
or equivalent).
Use molybdenum disulfide grease (containing more than 3% molybdenum disulfide, NLGI #2 or
equivalent).
Example: Molykote® BR-2 plus manufactured by Dow corning U.S.A.
Multi-purpose M-2 manufactured by Mitsubishi Oil, Japan
Use molybdenum disulfide paste (containing more than 40% molybdenum disulfide, NLGI #2 or
equivalent).
Example: Molykote® G-n paste manufactured by Dow Corning, U.S.A.
Honda Moly 60 (U.S.A. only)
Rocol ASP manufactured by Rocol Limited, U.K.
Rocol Paste manufactured by Sumico Lubricant, Japan
Use silicone grease.
Apply a locking agent. Use a middle strength locking agent unless otherwise specified.
Apply sealant.
Use DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid. Use the recommended brake fluid unless otherwise specified.
Use Fork or Suspension Fluid.

1. GENERAL INFORMATION
SERVICE RULES 1-1 FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/
STEERING SPECIFICATIONS 1-7
MODEL IDENTIFICATION 1-2
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
SERIAL NUMBERS 1-3
SPECIFICATIONS1-8
COLOUR LABEL 1-3
BRAKE SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 1-8
1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1-4
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS1-8
SPECIFICATIONS1-5
ELECTRIC STARTER SPECIFICATION 1-9
FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 1-5
IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 1-9
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
LIGHTS/METER/SWITCHES
SPECIFICATIONS1-5
SPECIFICATIONS1-9
CYLINDER/PISTON SPECIFICATIONS 1-6
STANDARD TORQUE VALUES 1-10
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
ENGINE & FRAME TORQUE VALUES 1-10
SPECIFICATIONS1-6
LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS 1-13
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
SPECIFICATIONS1-6 CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING 1-15
CRANKCASE CRANKSHAFT/ EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 1-22
TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER
SPECIFICATIONS1-7
SERVICE RULES
1. Use genuine HONDA or HONDA–recommended parts and lubricants or their equivalents. Parts that do not meet Honda’s
design specifications may cause damage to the motorcycle.
2. Use the special tools designed for this product to avoid damage and incorrect assembly.
3. Use only metric tools when servicing the motorcycle. Metric bolts, nuts and screws are not interchangeable with English fasteners.
4. Install new gaskets, O–rings, cotter pins, and lock plates when reassembling.
5. When tightening bolts or nuts, begin with the larger diameter or inner bolt first. Then tighten to the specified torque diagonally
in incremental steps unless a particular sequence is specified.
6. Clean parts in cleaning solvent upon disassembly. Lubricate any sliding surfaces before reassembly.
7. After reassembly, check all parts for proper installation and operation.
8. Route all electrical wires as shown in the Cable and Harness Routing (page 1-15).
ABBREVIATION
Abbrev. Term Full term
PAIR Pulse Secondary Air Injection
1-1
GENERAL INFORMATION
MODEL IDENTIFICATION
This manual covers 2 type of CBF 160 models
STD and CBS
1-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
SERIAL NUMBERS
Frame Serial Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (V.I.N.) is stamped other
right side of the steering head.
Vehicle Identification Number: ME4KC23 XXXXXXXXXX
FRAME SERIAL NUMBER
Engine Serial Number

The Engine Serial Number is stamped on the lower left
side of the crankcase.
Engine Serial Number: KC23E – X – XXXXXXX
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
Carburetor Serial Number

The carburetor identification number is stamped on the left
side of the carburetor body.
Carburetor identification number: AVK 6BA X XXXX
CARBURETOR IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
COLOR LABEL
The color label is attached as shown. When ordering
color - coded parts, always specify the designated color
S.NO. Colour Colour Code
code.
1. Pearl Nightstar Black NHA84
2. Sports Red R321
3. Pearl Amazing White NHB63
4. Pearl Siren Blue - A PB123
5. Neo Orange Metallic YR302
1-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATION Page NO.
Overall length 2041 mm (80.4 in) –
Overall width 783 mm (30.8 in) –
Overall height 1067 mm (42.0 in) –
Wheelbase 1346 mm (52.9 in) –
DIMENSIONS Seat height 794 mm (31.2 in) –
Foot peg height 314 mm (12.7 in) –
Ground clearance 164 mm (6.4 in) –
Dry weight (STD/CBS) 128 kg (286.6 lbs) / 130 kg (288.8 lbs) –
Maximum weight capacity 170 kg (330.6 lbs) –
Frame type Diamond type –
Front suspension Telescopic fork Page 3–23
Front axle travel 117 mm (4.6 in) –
Rear suspension Swing arm Page 3–23
Rear axle travel 113 mm (4.4 in) –
Rear damper Mono suspension –
Front tyre size (BRAND) 100/80-17M/C 52S (MRF) Page 3–25
FRAME Rear tyre size (BRAND) 140/70 -17 M/C 66S (MRF) Page 3–25
Front brake Disc Type ( Hydraulic Single Disc) –
STD Drum Type ( Mechanical Leading Trailing) –
Rear brake
CBS Disc Type ( Hydraulic Single Disc) –
Caster angle 250 30 –
Trail length 100 mm (3.9 in) –
Fuel tank capacity 12.0 litre (3.17 US gal, 2.63 Imp gal) –
Fuel tank reserve capacity 1.7 litre (0.52 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) –
Cylinder arrangement Single cylinder inclined 15° from vertical –
Bore and stroke 57.3 x 63.096 mm (2.25 x 2.48 in) –
Displacement 162.71 cm³ –
Compression ratio 10:01 –
Valve train Chain driven OHC with rocker arm –
Opens at 1.08 mm (0.04 in) lift 10° BTDC –
Intake valve
Closes at 1.08 mm (0.04 in) lift 35° ABDC –
ENGINE
Opens at 1.24 mm (0.04 in) lift 35° BBDC –
Exhaust valve
Closes at 1.24 mm (0.04 in) lift 5° ATDC –
Lubrication system Forced pressure and wet sump –
Oil pump type Trochoid –
Cooling system Air cooled –
Air filtration Viscous paper filter –
Engine dry weight 29.4 kg (65.03 lbs) –
Carburetor type CV (constant velocity) type Page 5–6
CARBURETOR
Throttle bore 28 mm (1.10 in) –
Clutch system Multi plate, wet clutch –
Clutch operation system Cable operation Page 3–22
Transmission 5 Speed, Manual Page 11–6
Primary reduction 3.136 (69/22) –
Final reduction 3.133 (47/15) –
DRIVE TRAIN 1st 3.076 (40/13) –
2nd 1.789 (34/19) –
Gear ratio 3rd 1.300 (26/20) –
4th 1.066 (32/30) –
5th 0.916 (22/24) –
Gearshift pattern Left foot operation system (1–N–2–3–4–5) –
Battery capacity 12V, 4Ah Page 15–3
Ignition system DIGITAL DC – C.D.I. Page 16–1
ELECTRICAL Starting system Electric starter motor –
Charging system Single phase output alternator Page 15–1
Regulator / Rectifier SCR Shorted, Single phase half wave rectification Page 15–9
1-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
LUBRICATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT Page NO.
At draining 1.0 litre ( 1.0 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt) – Page 3–11
Engine oil capacity
At disassembly 1.2 litre ( 1.3 US qt, 1.1 Imp qt) – Page 3–11
Honda 4-stroke oil or equivalent motor oil
Recommended engine oil API service classification: MA – Page 3–10
Viscosity: SAE 10W–30
Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) 0.20 (0.008) Page 4–4
Oil pump rotor Body clearance 0.15 – 0.20 (0.006 – 0.008) 0.25 (0.010) Page 4–4
Side clearance 0.05 – 0.10 (0.002 – 0.004) 0.15 (0.006) Page 4–4
FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS Page NO.
Carburetor identification number AVK6BA Page 1–3
Main jet #118 Page 5–11
Slow jet #38 Page 5–11
Pilot screw initial opening 2 1/8 Page 5–18
Float level 13.0 mm (0.51in) Page 5–12
Engine Idle speed 1,400 ± 100 min–1 (rpm) Page 5–18
Throttle grip free play 2 ~ 6 mm (0.07 – 0.2 in) Page 3–5
PAIR control valve specified vacuum 53.3 kPa (400 mm Hg) Page 5–20
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

Cylinder compression at 650 min–1 (rpm) 1300 kPa (13.2 kgf/cm², 188.5 psi) – Page 7–4
IN 0.08 (0.003) – Page 3–9
Valve clearance
EX 0.24 (0.010) – Page 3–9
IN 4.975 – 4.990 (0.1958 – 0.1964) 4.92 (0.194) Page 7–13
Valve stem O.D.
EX 4.955 – 4.970 (0.1950 – 0.1956) 4.90 (0.193) Page 7–13
Valve, Valve guide I.D. IN/EX 5.000 – 5.012 (0.1969 – 0.1973) 5.04 (0.198) Page 7–14
valve guide IN 0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015) 0.07 (0.003) Page 7–14
Stem-to-guide clearance
EX 0.030 – 0.057 (0.0012 – 0.0022) 0.09 (0.004) Page 7–14
Valve seat width IN/EX 0.9 - 1.1 (0.035 - 0.043) 1.5 (0.06) Page 7–15
INNER 35.59 (1.415) 35.14 (1.383) Page 7–13
Valve spring Free length
OUTER 39.46 (1.553) 38.60 (1.519) Page 7–13
Shaft O.D. IN/EX 9.988 – 10.000 (0.3926 – 0.3936) 9.91 (0.390) Page 7–11
Rocker arm
Arm to shaft clearance OUTER 0.002 – 0.049 (0.0001 – 0.0019) 0.10 (0.004) Page 7–11
IN 34.46 – 34.54 (1.356 – 1.359) 32.96 (1.298) Page 7–8
Camshaft Cam lobe height
EX 34.29 – 34.37 (1.349 – 1.353) 32.85 (1.293) Page 7–8
Cylinder head warpage – 0.05 (0.002) Page 7–13
1-5
GENERAL INFORMATION
CYLINDER/PISTON SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

I.D. 57.300 – 57.310 (2.2559 – 2.2563) 57.40 (2.260) Page 8–2
Out-of-round – 0.10 (0.004) Page 8–3
Cylinder
Taper – 0.10 (0.004) Page 8–3
Warpage – 0.10 (0.004) Page 8–3
Piston O.D. at 10 (0.4) from bottom 57.280 – 57.295 (2.2551 – 2.2557) 57.20 (2.252) Page 8–4
Piston pin hole I.D. 14.002 – 14.008 (0.5512 – 0.5514) 14.04 (0.553) Page 8–4
Piston pin O.D. 13.994 – 14.000 (0.5510 – 0.5511) 13.96 (0.550) Page 8–5
Piston, Piston-to-piston pin clearance 0.002 – 0.014 (0.0001 – 0.0006) 0.04 (0.002) Page 8–5
piston pin, Top 0.07 – 0.17 (0.002 – 0.0066) 0.40 (0.016) Page 8–5
piston ring Piston ring end gap Second 0.10 – 0.25 (0.004 – 0.010) 0.40 (0.016) Page 8–5
Oil (side rail) 0.10 – 0.35 (0.008 – 0.013) 0.85 (0.033) Page 8–5
Piston ring-to-ring Top 0.030 – 0.060 (0.0012 – 0.0024) 0.10 (0.004) Page 8–5
groove clearance Second 0.015 – 0.050 (0.0006 – 0.0020) 0.10 (0.004) Page 8–5
Cylinder-to-piston clearance 0.005 – 0.030 (0.0002 – 0.0012) 0.09 (0.004) Page 8–4
Connecting rod small end I.D. 14.010 – 14.028 (0.5516 – 0.5523) 14.06 (0.554) Page 8–5
Connecting rod-to-piston pin clearance 0.010 – 0.034 (0.0004 – 0.0013) 0.10 (0.004) Page 8–5
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

Clutch lever free play 10 – 20 (0.4 – 0.8) – Page 3–22
Spring free length 38.4 (1.59) 37.5 (1.47) Page 9–8
Clutch Disc thickness 2.92 – 3.08 (0.115 – 0.121) 2.6 (0.10) Page 9–9
Plate warpage – 0.20 (0.008) Page 9–9
Clutch outer I.D. 23.000 – 23.021 (0.9055 – 0.9063) 23.08 (0.909) Page 9–9
O.D. 22.959 – 22.980 (0.9039 – 0.9047) 22.93 (0.903) Page 9–9
Clutch outer guide
I.D. 16.991 – 17.009 (0.6689 – 0.6696) 17.04 (0.671) Page 9–9
Mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide 16.966 – 16.984 (0.6680 – 0.6687) 16.95 (0.667) Page 9–9
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

Starter driven gear boss O.D. 45.660 – 45.673 (1.7976 – 1.7981) 45.60 (1.795) Page 10–7
1-6
GENERAL INFORMATION
CRANKCASE/CRANKSHAFT/TRANSMISSION/
KICKSTARTER SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)
Runout – 0.03 (0.0007) Page 11–8
Crankshaft Connecting rod big end radial clearance 0 – 0.008 (0 – 0.0003) 0.05 (0.002) Page 11–9
Connecting rod big end side clearance 0.10 – 0.35 (0.003 – 0.014) 0.80 (0.032) Page 11–9
M4 20.000 – 20.018 (0.7874 – 0.7882) 20.05 (0.789) Page 11–7
M5 17.000 – 17.018 (0.6692 – 0.6699) 17.05 (0.671) Page 11–7
Gear I.D. C1 20.500 – 20.521 (0.8071 – 0.8079) 20.55 (0.809) Page 11–7
C2 23.020 – 23.041 (0.9063 – 0.9071) 23.07 (0.908) Page 11–7
C3 20.020 – 20.038 (0.7881 – 0.7888) 20.07 (0.790) Page 11–7
C1 20.459 – 20.480 (0.8055 – 0.8063) 20.41 (0.804) Page 11–7
Bushing O.D.
C2 22.984 – 23.005 (0.9049 – 0.9057) 22.95 (0.904) Page 11–7
Gear-to-bushing C1 0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024) 0.10 (0.004) Page 11–7
Transmission clearance C2 0.015 – 0.057 (0.0006 – 0.0022) 0.10 (0.004) Page 11–7
C1 17.000 – 17.018 (0.6693 – 0.6699) 17.04 (0.671) Page 11–7
Bushing I.D.
C2 20.020 – 20.041 (0.7882 – 0.7890) 20.07 (0.790) Page 11–7
C1 16.966 – 16.984 (0.6680 – 0.6687) 16.93 (0.667) Page 11–7
Mainshaft / C2 19.978 – 19.989 (0.7865 – 0.7870) 19.94 (0.785) Page 11–7
countershaft
O.D. M4 19.968 – 19.980 (0.7861 – 0.7866) 19.94 (0.785) Page 11–7
M5 16.968 – 16.980 (0.6679 – 0.6686) 16.93 (0.666) Page 11–7
Bushing-to-shaft C1 0.016 – 0.052 (0.0006 – 0.0020) 0.10 (0.004) Page 11–7
clearance C2 0.031 – 0.063 (0.0012 – 0.0025) 0.20 (0.008) Page 11–7
Shift fork shaft O.D. 9.986 – 9.995 (0.3931 – 0.3935) 9.93 (0.391) Page 11–8
Shift fork,
Shift fork I.D. 10.000 – 10.018 (0.3937 – 0.3944) 10.05 (0.396) Page 11–8
shift fork shaft
Shift fork claw thickness 4.930 – 5.000 (0.194 – 0.197) 4.500 (0.177) Page 11–8
Kickstarter drive gear I.D 20.00 – 20.21 (0.7873 – 0.7956) 16.06 (0.632) Page 11–21
Kickstarter spindle O.D. at Kickstarter drive gear 19.959 – 19.980 (0.7875 – 0.7866) 15.94 (0.628) Page 11–21
FRONT WHEEL/ SUSPENSION/STEERING SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

Minimum tire thread depth – 1.5 (0.06) Page 3–25
Driver only 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi) – Page 3–25
Cold tire pressure
Driver and passenger 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi) – Page 3–25
Axle runout – 0.2 (0.01) Page 12–10
Radial – 0.3 (0.01) Page 12–11
Wheel rim runout
Axial – 0.3 (0.01) Page 12–11
Spring free length 390.3 (15.366) 363 (14.291) Page 12–17
Pipe runout – 0.20 (0.008) Page 12–17
Honda Ultra Cushion Oil No.10
Recommended fluid – Page 12–20
Fork (BAHARAT SS-8)
Fluid level 144 mm (5.66 in) – Page 12–20
310 cm³ ± 2.5 cm³
Fluid capacity – Page 12–20
(11.0 ± 0.08 USoz, 11.5 ± 0.09 UKoz)
Steering head bearing preload 0.7 – 1.3 kgf (1.64 – 2.81 lbf) – Page 12–27
1-7
GENERAL INFORMATION
REAR WHEEL/ SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

Cold tire pressure
Radial – 0.3 (0.04) Page 13–6
Wheel rim runout
Axial – 0.3 (0.04) Page 13–6
Size/link 428/132 – Page 3–17
Drive chain
Slack 25 - 35 (0.984 - 1.37) 50 (1.96) Page 3–16
BRAKE SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

Specified brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4 – Page 14–5
Brake disc thickness 3.8 – 4.6 (0.14 – 0.15) 3.5 (0.13) Page 14–8
Brake disc runout – 0.10 (0.004) Page 14–9
STD 12.700 – 12.743 (0.4999 – 0.5017) 12.775 (0.5029) Page 14–11
Master cylinder I.D.
CBS 12.700 – 12.743 (0.4999 – 0.5017) 12.775 (0.5029) Page 14–11
FRONT BRAKE STD 12.657 – 12.684 (0.4983 – 0.4994) 12.645 (0.4978) Page 14–11
Master piston O.D.
AND MASTER CBS 12.657 – 12.684 (0.4983 – 0.4994) 12.645 (0.4978) Page 14–11
CYLINDER Caliper cylinder I.D. (STD) 25.400 – 25.450 (1.0000 – 1.0020) 25.460 (1.0024) Page 14–17
Cylinder A 22.650 – 22.700 (0.8917 – 0.8937) 22.710 (0.8941) Page 14–15
Caliper cylinder I.D.(CBS)
Cylinder B 27.000 – 27.050 (1.0629 – 1.0649) 25.460 (1.0023) Page 14–15
Caliper piston O.D. (STD) 25.318 – 25.368 (0.9968 – 0.9987) 25.31 (0.996) Page 14–17
Piston A 22.585 – 22.618 (0.8891 – 0.8904) 22.577 (0.888) Page 14–15
Caliper piston O.D. (CBS)
Piston B 26.935 – 26.968 (1.0604 – 0.8905) 26.927 (1.060) Page 14–15
REAR MASTER Master cylinder I.D. 14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529) 14.055 (0.5533) Page 14–22
CYLINDER Master piston O.D. 13.957 – 12.984 (0.5495 – 0.5529) 13.945 (0.5490) Page 14–22
(CBS/ Caliper cylinder I.D. 33.960 – 34.010 (1.3370 – 1.3389) 34.020 (1.3393) Page 14–25
DISC TYPE) Caliper piston O.D. 33.878 – 33.928 (1.3337 – 1.3357) 33.87 (1.333) Page 14–25
Brake pedal height 64.0 – 66.0 (2.51 – 2.59) – Page 14–23
Brake pedal free play 20 – 30 (0.787 – 1.178) – Page 3–20
REAR
Brake drum I.D. 130.0 - 130.2 (5.11 - 5.12) 131.0 (5.16) Page 14–30
(Drum Type)
Lining thickness To the Indicator –
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Capacity 12 V – 4 Ah Page 15–3
Current leakage 0.02mA max Page 15–7
Battery
Fully charged 12.5 - 13.0 V Page 15–3
Needs charging Below 12.4 V Page 15–3
Capacity 0.14kW / 5000 min-1(rpm) Page 15–8
Alternator
Charging coil resistance (200C / 680F) 0.2 – 1.0 Ω Page 15–8
1-8
GENERAL INFORMATION
ELECTRIC STARTER SPECIFICATION Unit: mm (in)

Starter motor brush length 10.00 – 10.05 (0.394 – 0.396) 6.5 (0.26) Page 10–11
IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Spark plug Standard CPR8EA-9 (NGK) Page 3–7
Spark plug gap 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.03 – 0.04 in) Page 3–7
Ignition coil peak voltage 100 V minimum Page 16–4
Ignition pulse generator peak voltage 0.7 V minimum Page 16–4
Ignition timing (“F” mark) 8° BTDC at 1400 rpm Page 16–5
Input voltage 5V Page 16–7
Throttle position sensor
Resistance (200C/680F) 4.0 –6.0 W Page 16–7
LIGHTS/METER/SWITCHES SPECIFICATIONS
Headlight (Hi/low beam) 12V – 35/35W –
Position light 12V - 5W x 2 –
Brake/tail light (LED) 2 W (LED)*9 –
Turn signal light 12V - 10W x 4 –
Bulb Instrument light 140 mcd LED*6 –
Turn signal indicator 56 mcd LED –
High-beam indicator 28 mcd LED –
Tail light 0.3 W (LED)*9 –
Neutral indicator 56 mcd LED –
Main 20A –
Fuse
Sub 15A & 5A –
Full 6–9W Page 17–14
Fuel level sensor
Empty 90 – 96 W Page 17–14
1-9
GENERAL INFORMATION
STANDARD TORQUE VALUES

TORQUE TORQUE
FASTENER TYPE FASTENER TYPE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
5 mm bolt and nut 5 (0.5, 3.6) 5 mm screw 4 (0.4, 2.9)
6 mm bolt and nut 10 (1.0, 7.3) 6 mm screw 9 (0.9, 6.5)
(Include SH flange bolt) 6 mm flange bolt 12 (1.2, 9)
8 mm bolt and nut 22 (2.2, 16) (Include NSHF) and nut
10 mm bolt and nut 34 (3.5, 25) 8 mm flange bolt and nut 26 (2.7, 20)
12 mm bolt and nut 54 (5.5, 40) 10 mm flange bolt and nut 39 (4.0, 29)
ENGINE & FRAME TORQUE VALUES

• Torque specifications listed below are for specified fasteners.
• Others should be tightened to standard torque values listed above.
NOTE
1. Apply engine oil to the threads and seating surface.
2. Apply locking agent to the threads.
3. U–nut/ Lock Nut
4. Apply grease to the threads.
ENGINE
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM PART NO. QTY REMARKS Page NO.
DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
MAINTENANCE
Spark plug 31916 – KRM – 841 1 10 16 (1.6, 12) Page 3–7
Valve adjusting lock nut 90206 – 250 – 000 2 6 18 (1.8, 13.2) NOTE 1 Page 3–9
Timing hole cap 90084 – MN8 – 010 1 14 10 (1.0, 7.3) Page 3–10
Crankshaft hole cap 90087 – KSP – 860 1 32 15 (1.5, 11) NOTE 4 Page 3–10
Oil drain bolt 90131 – KRM – 840 1 12 30 (3.0, 22) Page 3–11
Oil filter rotor cover screw 93700 – 05012 – 0A 3 5 4 (0.4, 3.0) Page 3–13
LUBRICATION
Oil pump plate screw 93901 – 34120 1 4 3 (0.3, 2.2) Page 4–6
Oil pump mounting bolt 95701 – 06035 – 00 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 4–6
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel tank mounting bolt 95701 – 06012 – 00 2 8 27 (2.8, 20) –
SE valve lock nut 16046 – KVC – 901 1 10 2.3 (0.2, 1.7) Page 5–6
Carburetor drain screw – 1 6 1.5 (0.2, 1.1) Page 5–6
Slow jet 16180 – K38 – 901 1 5 1.5 (0.1, 1.1) Page 5–11
Needle jet holder 16165 – K21 – 901 1 7 2.5 (0.25, 1.8) Page 5–11
Main jet 99101 – KTN – 118 1 5 2.1 (0.2, 1.6) Page 5–11
Float chamber screw 93500 – 04012 – 0H 3 4 2.1 (0.2, 1.6) Page 5–12
SE valve cover screw 93892 – 05012 – 18 2 5 3.4 (0.4, 2.5) Page 5–13
Vacuum chamber cover screw 93500 – 04008 – 1H 2 4 2.1 (0.2, 1.6) Page 5–14
Throttle cable stay screw 93500 – 05012 – 1H 2 5 3.4 (0.34, 2.5) Page 5–14
Insulator band screw 16217 – KSP – 910 1 5 1 (0.1, 0.7) Page 5–15
Fuel valve lock nut 16950 – K43 – 901 1 16 22 (2.2, 16) Page 5–23
Fuel unit 94050 – 06000 4 6 9 (0.9, 6.6) –
Cylinder head cover bolt 96001 – 06035 – 00 4 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) Page 7–6
Rocker arm shaft bolt 90002 – KRM – 840 2 5 5 (0.5, 3.7) Page 7–12
Cam sprocket bolt 90083 – KRM – 840 2 5 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 7–9
Cylinder stud bolt nuts 90201 – KRE – G00 4 9 30 (3.0, 22) NOTE 1 Page 7–19
Inlet pipe bolt 95701 – 06025 – 00 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 7–21
Cam chain tensioner lifter screw 90005 – K15 – 900 1 6 4 (0.4, 3.0) Page 7–22
Cylinder stud bolt 90031 – KRE – G00 2 9 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 7–19
90032 – KRE – G00 2 9 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 7–19
1-10
GENERAL INFORMATION
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM PART NO. QTY REMARKS Page NO.
Clutch center lock nut 90202 – KRM – 840 1 14 83 (8.3, 61) NOTE 1 Page 9–11
Clutch lifter plate bolt 90008 – KRM – 840 3 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 9–11
Oil filter rotor lock nut 90202 – KRM – 840 1 14 83 (8.3, 61) NOTE 1 Page 9–12
Shift drum stopper arm bolt 90022 – KRM – 840 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) NOTE 2 Page 9–13
Gear shift cam bolt 90003 – KVS – 900 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) NOTE 2 Page 9–14
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Flywheel lock nut 90201 – KRM – 840 1 14 74 (7.4, 55) NOTE 1 Page 10–5
Starter clutch bolt 90085 – KSP – 901 6 6 16 (1.6, 12) NOTE 2 Page 10–8
Ignition pulse generator mounting bolt 96001 – 06016 – 00 2 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) NOTE 2 Page 10–17
Wire guide bolt 96001 – 06016 – 00 1 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) NOTE 2 Page 10–17
CRANKCASE/CRANKSHAFT/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER DRIVE/KICK STARTER
Balancer Shaft Nut (Right crankcase) 90202 – KRM – 840 1 14 64 (6.5, 47) NOTE 1 Page 11–19
Balancer Shaft Nut (Left crankcase) 94002 – 12000 – 0S 1 12 55 (5.5, 44) NOTE 1 Page 11–20
Push plug bolt 96001 – 06016 – 00 1 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) Page 11–20
Drive sprocket 90084 – 041 – 0001 1 12 12 (1.2, 9) –
Brg hold plate(Right crankcase) 95701 – 06016 – 00 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) –
95702 – 06016 – 00 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) –
Brg hold plate(Left crankcase) 96001 – 06016 – 00 1 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) –
Pin, shift return spring 24652 – KRM – 840 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) –
EXHAUST PIPE STUD BOLT INSULATOR BAND SCREW: CYLINDER STUD BOLT:
7 – 9 mm
175.5 – 178.5 mm
20.5 – 22.5 mm
(0.3 – 0.4 in)
139.0 – 142.0 mm
(0.81 – 0.89 in)
Embed to
Incomplete
Thread
Embed to incomplete thread 90032–K38–901 90031–K38–901
1-11
GENERAL INFORMATION
FRAME
THREAD
TORQUE
ITEM PART NO. QTY DIA. REMARKS PAGE NO.
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
(mm)
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exhaust pipe stud bolt 90035 – KRM – 840 2 8 11 (1.1, 8) Page 2–9
Sari Guard flange bolt 95701 – 08014 – 07 2 8 22 (2.2, 16) Page 2–8
95701 – 08040 – 07 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) Page 2–8
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Front engine hanger nut 95801 – 10090 – 00 4 10 45 (3.5, 26) Page 6–5
Rear engine hanger nut 90019 – 399 – 010 2 10 54 (5.5, 37.6) Page 6–5
Drive sprocket fixing plate bolt 90084 – 041 – 000 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 6–5
FRONT WHEEL/BRAKE/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Front brake disc bolt 90105 – KSP – 870 5 8 42 (4.3, 31) NOTE 2 Page 12–12
Front axle nut 90306 – KTE – 911 1 12 59 (5.9, 43) NOTE 3 Page 12–13
Handlebar upper holder bolt 90111 – 362 – 000 4 6 22 (2.2, 16) Page 12–6
Master cylinder holder bolt 96001 – 06022 – 07 2 6 9 (0.9,6.6) Page 12–9
Rear view mirror lock nut 90201 – MW3 – 620 2 10 34 (3.5, 26) Page 12–9
Fork socket bolt 90116 – KV3 – 701 2 8 20 (2.0, 15) NOTE 2 Page 12–20
Fork cap 51450 – K43 – 901 2 33 22 (2.2, 16) Page 12–22
Bottom bridge pinch bolt 95701 – 10032 – 07 2 10 32 (3.2, 23) Page 12–22
Top bridge bolt 90101 – K43 – 900 2 8 22 (2.2, 16) Page 12–22
Steering bearing adjustment nut 53220 – KSP – 860 1 26 2.5 (0.25, 1.8) Page 12–26
Steering stem nut 90304 – KSP – 900 1 24 74 (7.5, 55) Page 12–27
REAR WHEEL/BRAKE/SUSPENSION
Rear brake arm 90302 – KTE – 911 1 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) NOTE 3 –
Rear brake disc bolt 90105 – KSP – 870 4 8 42 (4.3, 31) Page 13–12
Driven sprocket nut 90304 – KTE – 911 4 10 64 (6.4, 47) NOTE 3 Page 13–12
Rear axle nut 90305 – KYJ – 711 1 16 88 (8.8, 65) NOTE 3 Page 13–9
Shock absorber mounting nut 90304 – KTE – 911 2 10 44 (4.4, 32) NOTE 3 Page 13–13
Shock absorber mounting bolt Upper 90153 – KYJ – 900 1 10 44 (4.4, 32) NOTE 3 Page 13–13
Shock absorber mounting bolt Lower 90151 – KSP – 900 1 10 44 (4.4, 32) Page 13–13
Swing arm pivot bolt 90121 – KSP – 900 1 14 54 (5.4, 40) NOTE 3 Page 13–17
HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Caliper bleeder valve 43352 – 568 – 0030 1 8 5.4 (0.55, 4) Page 14–5
FR Master cylinder cap 93600 – 04012 – 1G 2 4 1.5 (0.15, 1.1) Page 14–6
RR Master cylinder cap 43516 – K43911 2 4 1.5 (0.15, 1.1) –
Brake caliper mounting bolt 90131 – KYJ – 7101 2 8 30 (3.0, 22) Page 14–16
Front brake light switch screw 90508 – K21 – 921 1 4 1.2 (1.2, 0.9) Page 14–13
Brake lever pivot bolt(Disk) 90114 – 166 – 006 1 6 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Page 14–13
Brake lever pivot nut (Disk) 94050 – 06000 1 6 5.9 (0.59, 4.4) Page 14–13
Brake hose oil bolt 90145 – GAZ – 981 2 10 34 (3.4, 25) Page 14–16
FR caliper secondery pin (STD) 45131 – GZ0 – 006 1 8 17.2 (1.7, 12) –
FR caliper hanger pin (STD) 45215 – KPH – 951 1 10 17.2 (1.7, 12) –
FR brake caliper pin (CBS) 45131 – ML7 – 921 1 8 22 (0.6, 16) NOTE 2 –
FR brake caliper hangar pin (CBS) 45215 – MBT – D51 1 10 17.2 (1.7, 12) Page 14–8
CBS M/C joint nut 95701 – 06022 – 08 1 6 17.2 (1.7, 12) –
CBS M/C holder bolts 90701 – 06022 – 08 2 6 12 (1.2, 8.8) Page 14–23
Brake pipe joint nut 46312 – VMO – 770 1 10 14 (1.4, 10) –
CARBURETOR
Throttle position sensor screw 16080 – KTN – 901 1 5 3.4 (0.4, 2.5) Page 16–8
LIGHTS/METER/SWITCHES
Fuel level sensor mounting nut 94050 – 06000 4 6 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 17–16
SIDE STAND
Side stand pivot screw 90107 – GN1 – 010 1 10 10 (1.0, 7.3) Page 2–8
Side stand lock nut 90304 – KTE – 911 1 10 39 (3.9, 28.7) Page 2-8
1-12
GENERAL INFORMATION
LUBRICATION AND SEAL POINTS

ENGINE
LOCATION MATERIAL REMARKS
Crankcase mating area Liquid sealant 6.5 (0.26)
Alternator wire grommet seating surface

Oil pump rotors Engine oil
Oil through sliding area
Oil pump drive gear teeth
Rocker arm shaft entire surface
Rocker arm inner surface and roller surface
Camshaft lobes
Cam chain entire surface
Cylinder inner surface
Piston outer surface and piston rings
Clutch disc entire surface
Primary drive gear teeth
Primary driven gear teeth
Clutch lifter rod sliding surface
Gearshift spindle journal rotating area
Electric starter idle gear shaft entire surface
Electric starter idle gear teeth
Electric starter driven gear teeth
Transmission gear teeth
Shift fork shaft sliding area
Shift drum journal rotating area
Each bearing rotating area
Each O–ring
Each dust seal lip Multi– purpose grease
Each oil seal lip
Crankshaft hole cap threads
Valve stem sliding surface Molybdenum oil solution
Piston pin entire surface (a mixture of engine oil and
Clutch outer guide entire surface molybdenum disulfide grease in a
Clutch outer rotating area ratio of 1:1)
Starter clutch rolling surfaces
Crankshaft connecting rod big end needle bearing
Crankshaft connecting rod small end inner surface
Crankshaft bearing push plug entire surface
M4, M5, C1, C2, C3 gear rotating surface
C1, C2, C3 gear bushing entire surface
M3, C4, C5 gear shift fork grooves
Shift drum stopper arm bolt threads Locking agent Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm from tip
Gear shift cam bolt threads Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm from tip
Starter clutch bolt threads Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm from tip
Ignition pulse generator mounting bolt threads Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm from tip
Crankshaft push plug plate Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm from tip
Alternator stator wire guide bolt threads Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm from tip
1-13
GENERAL INFORMATION
FRAME
LOCATION MATERIAL REMARKS
Steering head bearings Use Water resistant multi–purpose Apply Min 3g
Steering head cone race grease {Excelite EP2 Apply Min 3g
Steering head bearing dust seal lips (KYODO YUSHI CO. LTD) Apply Min 3g
or equivalent}
Axle bolt surface Multi–purpose grease 6.5 (0.26)
Wheel distance collar surface
Front wheel dust seal lips
Driven flange dust seal lip
Rear wheel hub O–ring
Rear brake cam rotating surface and shoe contacting
area
Rear brake panel anchor pin
Swing arm needle bearings
Swing arm pivot collar surface
Swing arm pivot dust seal cap lips
Swing arm pivot bolt and nut threads
Center stand pivot
Throttle grip pipe rotating area
Clutch lever pivot
Brake lever pivot
Brake master cylinder push rod contacting area
Brake caliper pin boot inner surface
Brake caliper pin sliding surface
Each dust seal lips
Each bearing rotating area
Each O–ring
Rear brake pedal equalizer pivot
Rear brake cam felt seal Gear oil
(IDEMITSU AUTOLUB 30
or MECHANIC OIL 44 or
equivalent)
Drive chain Gear oil
(SAE #80 – 90) / Molten grease
Throttle cable boot inside and connecting area Silicone grease
Clutch cable boot inside and connecting area
Rear brake pedal pivot rotating area
Brake master cylinder piston cups DOT3 or DOT4 brake fluid
Throttle cable case inside Molybdenum oil solution
Clutch cable case inside (a mixture of engine oil and
molybdenum disul fide grease
in a ratio of 1:1)
Fork socket bolt threads Locking agent
Ignition switch mounting bolt threads
Combination and lock switch bolt
Fork cap O–ring Fork fluid
Fork oil seal lips
Handlebar grip inner surface Honda Bond A or equivalent
1-14
GENERAL INFORMATION
CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING
THROTTLE CABLE FRONT BRAKE HOSE CLUTCH CABLE
CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
FRONT BRAKE LIGHT
WIRING HARNESS
SWITCH WIRE
STARTER SWITCH WIRE HEADLIGHT CONNECTOR
CONNECT BOOT FOR:

–– Left Handlebar switch
–– Turn signal light
–– Ignition switch
–– Front brakelight switch
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL

LEFT TURN SIGNAL
LIGHT WIRE
LIGHT WIRE
RIGHT POSITION
LIGHT WIRE
LEFT POSITION
FRONT SUB
LIGHT WIRE HEADLIGHT 3P HARNESS 6P
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1-15
GENERAL INFORMATION
SELF STARTER SWITCH
LEFT HANDLEBAR SELF STARTER

SWITCH WIRE MAIN WIRE HARNESS
SWITCH WIRE
CDI UNIT
FRONT VIEW
CLUTCH
CABLE
GUIDE
MAIN WIRE
HARNESS
HORN WIRE
CHOKE KNOB
1-16
GENERAL INFORMATION
CBS TYPE:
THROTTLE CABLE
SPARK PLUG WIRE FRONT BRAKE

REAR BRAKE LIGHT HOSE
CLUTCH CABLE
SWITCH WIRE FRONT BRAKE
HOSE (CBS)
1-17
GENERAL INFORMATION
STD TYPE:
THROTTLE CABLE
CLUTCH CABLE SPARK PLUG WIRE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE
REAR BRAKE LIGHT
SWITCH WIRE
1-18
GENERAL INFORMATION
MAIN FUSE AND BATTERY POSITIVE (+)

STARTER MAG., SWITCH CONNECTOR
FUEL HOSE
RESISTOR COMP WIRE
BATTERY NEGATIVE (–)
CONNECTOR
BATTERY BOX SUB FUSE
(15A & 10A)
CHOKE CABLE
NEUTRAL SWITCH WIRE
CONNECTOR BOOT:
– IGNITION PULSE GENERATOR
BATTERY TRAY TUBE – ALTERNATOR 2P (WHITE) CONNECTOR
– SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTORS
FUEL TANK
DRAIN TUBE CARBURETOR
DRAIN TUBE
1-19
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECONDARY AIR SUCTION HOSE
THROTTLE CABLE
REAR BRAKE LIGHT
SWITCH WIRE
CRANKCASE BREATHER PIPE

REGULATOR AND
RECTIFIER WIRE
1-20
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONNECTOR BOOT:
– REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
WIRE CONNECTOR
BRAKE/ TAIL LIGHT – LICENCE PLATE LIGHT
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1-21
GENERAL INFORMATION
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

SOURCE OF EMISSIONS
The combustion process produces carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC). Control of carbon monox-
ide, oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons is very important because, under certain conditions, they react to form photochemical smog
when subjected to sunlight. Carbon monoxide does not react in the same way, but it is toxic.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. utilizes appropriate carburetor settings as well as other systems, to reduce carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons.
CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The engine is equipped with a closed crankcase system to prevent discharging crankcase emissions into the atmosphere. Blow–by gas
is returned to the combustion chamber through the air cleaner and carburetor.
AIR CLEANER HOUSING
FRESH AIR
BLOW–BY–GAS
1-22
GENERAL INFORMATION
EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The exhaust emission control system is composed of a pulse secondary air injection system and lean carburetor settings.
No adjustment should be made except idle speed adjustment with the throttle stop screw. The exhaust emission control system is
separate from the crankcase emission control system.
SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM

The secondary air supply system introduces filtered air into the exhaust gases in the exhaust port. Fresh air is drawn into the exhaust
port by the function of the PAIR control valve.
This charge of fresh air promotes burning of the unburned exhaust gases and changes a considerable amount of hydrocarbons and
carbon monoxide into relatively harmless carbon dioxide and water vapour.
The reed valve prevents reverse air flow through the system. The PAIR control valve reacts to high intake manifold vacuum and will cut
off the supply of fresh air during engine deceleration, thereby preventing after burn in the exhaust system.
No adjustments to the secondary air supply system should be made, although periodic inspection of the components is recommended.
RESONATOR
PAIR CONTROL VALVE
AIR CHAMBER
AIR CLEANER HOUSING
PAIR CHECK VALVE
EXHAUST PORT
FRESH AIR
EXHAUST GAS
OXIDATION CATALYTIC CONVERTER

This motorcycle is equipped with an oxidation catalytic converter.
The oxidation catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC and CO in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapour.
NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

TAMPERING WITH THE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM IS PROHIBITED: Local law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for the purpose of maintenance, repair or replacement, of
any device or element of design incorporated into any vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
customer or while it is in use: or (2) the use of any vehicle after such device or element of design has been remove or rendered inop-
erative by any person.
AMONG THOSE ACTS PRESUMED TO CONSTITUTE TAMPERING ARE THE ACTS LISTED BELOW:
1. Removal of or puncturing of the muffler, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.
2. Removal of or puncturing of any parts of the intake system.
3. Lack of proper maintenance.
4. Replacing any moving parts of the vehicle, or parts of the exhaust or intake system, with parts other than those specified by the
manufacturer.
1-23
GENERAL INFORMATION
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

This device collects the fuel vapour from the fuel tank and is routed into the evaporative emission canister, where it is absorbed and
stored while the engine is stopped. When the engine is running and evaporative emission (EVAP) one way valve is open, fuel vapour in
the canister is drawn into the engine through the carburetor for reburning to avoid air pollution caused by fuel vapour diffused into the air.
No adjustment to the canister or the one way valve is required.
FUEL TANK
EVAP CANISTER
CARBURETOR
FRESH AIR
EVAP ONE WAY VALVE
FUEL VAPOUR
AMONG THOSE ACTS PRESUMED TO CONSTITUTE TAMPERING ARE THE ACTS LISTED BELOW:
1. Removal of or puncturing of the muffler, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.
2. Removal of or puncturing of any parts of the intake system.
3. Lack of proper maintenance.
4. Replacing any moving parts of the vehicle, or parts of the exhaust or intake system, with parts other than those specified by the
manufacturer.
1-24
2. FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
SERVICE INFORMATION 2-1 FRONT FENDER 2-5
TROUBLESHOOTING2-1 REAR GRIP 2-6
FRONT COWL 2-2 REAR GARNISH SET 2-7
FRONT COWL DISASSEMBLY 2-2 REAR COWL 2-7 2
COVER HEADLIGHT RR 2-2 REAR FENDER 2-7
SEAT2-3 SARI GUARD 2-8
RIGHT SIDE COVER 2-3 SIDE STAND 2-8
LEFT SIDE COVER 2-3 EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER 2-8
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY 2-3 MUFFLER PROTECTOR 2-9
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where the gasoline is stored can cause
a fire or explosion.
• This section covers removal and installation of the body panels, fuel tank and exhaust system.
• Serious burns may result if the exhaust system is not allowed to cool before components are removed or serviced.
• Always replace the exhaust pipe gasket with a new one after loosening or removing the exhaust pipe joint nuts.
• When installing the exhaust system, loosely install all of the exhaust pipe/muffler fasteners, always tighten the exhaust pipe
joint nuts first, then tighten the mounting bolt and nut, if you tighten the mounting bolt and nut first, the exhaust pipe may not
seat properly.
• Always inspect the exhaust system for leaks after installation.
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM PART NO. QTY REMARKS PAGE NO.
Exhaust Pipe Stud bolt 90035 – KRM – 840 2 8 11 (1.1, 8) Page 2-9
Muffler mounting bolt 90305 – KSP – 900 1 6 26 (2.6, 20) Page 2-9
Sari Guard flange bolt 95701 – 08014 – 07 2 8 22 (2.2, 16) Page 2-8
95701 – 08040 – 07 1 8 22 (2.2, 16) Page 2-8
Side stand pivot bolt 90107 – GN1 – 010 1 10 10 (1.0, 7.3) Page 2-8
Side stand lock nut 90304 – KTE – 911 1 10 39 (3.9, 28.7) Page 2-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Excessive exhaust noise
• Broken exhaust system
• Exhaust gas leak
Poor performance
• Deformed exhaust system
• Clogged muffler
2-1
FRONT COWL 6P BLACK GROMMET

BOSS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION CONNECTOR
GROMMET
Align the Remove the front cowl pan screws (4 nos.).
grommet with
Disconnect 6P black connector (Headlight).
front cowl
Carefully release the front cowl from the boss.
Remove the front cowl.
During the installation align boss with grommet in front cowl.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PAN
FRONT COWL SCREWS
FRONT COWL DISASSEMBLY

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION RIGHT
GARNISH WINDSCREEN
Remove the windscreen screw (1 no.) and release carefully
from lugs.
RIGHT TURN
Remove the headlight aim adjusting bolt (1 no.) and WINKER
headlight mounting bolts (2 nos.).
Remove both the winkers from the stays by removing
their bolts.
Remove the right and left garnish by removing screws
(2 nos.) from both side and tabs carefully.
Remove the number plate stay by removing screws (4 nos.). HEADLIGHT
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SCREWS
NUMBER LEFT LEFT TURN

PLATE STAY GARNISH WINKER
COVER HEADLIGHT RR COVER HEADLIGHT RR WIRE HARNESS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION MOUNTING
BOLTS
Remove the 16P grey connector from combination meter.
Remove the 2P white winker relay connector.
Remove the 5P white passing relay connector.
Disconnect all connectors from the wiring harness.
Remove mounting bolts (4 nos) from cover headlight RR.
TURN SIGNAL
16P CONNECTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
2-2
SEAT SEAT
IGNITION KEY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Insert the ignition key into the seat lock and turn it clockwise.
Slide seat backward and remove the seat.
Install the seat, while aligning its hook with the bracket on
the frame and press it to lock and remove the ignition key.
RIGHT SIDE COVER GROMMET
Be careful not Remove the right side cover pan screw (1 no.) and trim
to damage clips (2 nos.) from the fuel tank.
the side cover
boss. Carefully release the right side cover bosses (3 nos.) from TRIM CLIP
the grommet and slide the cover towards rear wheel for
easy removal.
Remove the right side cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PAN
SCREW RIGHT SIDE
TRIM CLIP COVER
LEFT SIDE COVER GROMMET
Be careful not Remove the left side cover pan screw (1 no.) and and trim
to damage clips (2 nos.) from the fuel tank.
the side cover
Carefully release the left side cover bosses (3 nos.) from TRIM CLIP
boss.
the grommet and slide the cover towards rear wheel for
easy removal.
Remove the left side cover.
PAN
LEFT SIDE SCREW
TRIM CLIP
COVER
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY

Remove seat (page 2-3)
Remove the left side cover (page 2-3).
Remove the left side rear garnish set (page 2-6).
Turn the fuel valve to “OFF” position, and disconnect the
fuel hose from the fuel valve.
FUEL VALVE FUEL HOSE
2-3
FUEL TANK CENTER COVER

Remove the following :
–– Socket bolt (3 nos.)from fuel tank cap
After removing
fuel filler cap –– Screw (1 nos.) from fuel tank center cover rear side
cover the fuel –– Trim clip (2 nos.) from fuel tank center cover front side
tank opening
with masking Unlock the fuel tank cap by using ignition key and remove
tape. the fuel filler cap.
Press the fuel tank side cover inwards and release the fuel
center cover first from rear side and then from front side.
Installation of fuel tank center cover is in the reverse order
of removal.
FUEL TANK LEFT & RIGHT SIDE COVER

–– Fuel tank center cover
–– Screws (4 nos. each) from both side covers
Disengage the rear garnish hook from fuel tank side covers.
Carefully liftup the side covers upwards and release from
fuel tank mountings.
Installation of fuel tank left & right side cover is in the
reverse order of removal.
FUEL TANK FUEL TANK BOLT

Remove the fuel tank mounting bolts/washers (2 nos.).
WASHER
Wipe the spilled While raising the fuel tank disconnect the fuel unit
gasoline off at 3P (White) connector.
once.
Disconnect the breather pipe, fuel tube and canister hose 3P (WHITE)
pipe from the fuel tank CONNECTOR
After installation,
turn the fuel Pull back and remove the fuel tank.
valve “ON”, and Installation of fuel tank is in the reverse order of removal.
make sure
that there are Install the fuel tank left & right side cover.
no fuel leaks. Install the fuel tank center cover.
BREATHER PIPE CANISTER HOSE PIPE
2-4
FRONT FENDER
Remove the front wheel (page 12–9).
PAN
Remove the pan screws (2 nos.) from both side and inner SCREWS
bolts (2 nos.) from the front fender mounted on the forks. RUBBER FR FENDER
MOUNTING
–– Inner bolts with washer (2 nos.)
FRONT
–– Front fender and stay
FENDER
COLLAR A FR
FENDER
PAN
SCREWS
WASHER
INNER BOLT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the front fender (page 2-5).
SCREWS
Remove the mounting screws (2 nos.) from front fender B FRONT FENDER - A
and release front fender A.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
FRONT FENDER - B
2-5
REAR GRIP MOUNTING

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION BOLTS
Remove the seat (page 2-3).

Remove the mounting bolts (2 nos.) from right rear grip.
REAR GRIP REAR GRIP
Remove the mounting bolts (2 nos.) from left rear grip.
RIGHT LEFT
REAR GARNISH SET REAR GARNISH

BOLTS
SCREWS RIGHT
Carefully Remove the following:
release the
–– Seat (page 2-3)
garnish from BOSS
boss (metal) by –– Rear grip (page 2-6)
tilting slightly. REAR
–– Right side cover (page 2-3)
GARNISH
–– Left side cover (page 2-3) LEFT
Remove the mounting bolts (1 no.) from the rear garnish
from both side.
Remove the screw (1 no.) from the fuel tank of the rear
garnish from both side.
Remove the screw (1 no.) from the bottom side of the rear
garnish from both side.
2-6
REAR COWL REAR COWL

ASSEMBLY
REAR COWL
CENTER
While installing MOUNTING
Remove the rear garnish from both side (page 2-6). BOLTS
the rear cowl
route the Remove the mounting bolts (4 nos.), collar (4 nos.),
rubber (4 nos.). SCREWS
wire harness
properly Remove the screws (2 nos.) from the rear center cowl
(page 1-15). and slide it backward to remove from rear cowl assembly.
Carefully release set lock cable from the left side rear cowl.
9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 6.6 lbf.ft)
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY REAR BRAKE TAIL

While installing Remove mounting screw (1 no.) from inner fender stay COWL LIGHT UNIT
the rear cowl from both side and remove both side rear cowl. RIGHT
route the
Remove screws (3 nos.) from inner fender stay and release
wire harness INNER
rear tail light unit.
properly FENDER
(page 1-15). Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. STAY
REAR
SCREWS COWL
LEFT
REAR FENDER
Remove the rear cowl (page 2-7).
Disconnect the turn signal and licence plate light wire
connectors.
Remove wire harness clamps (2 nos.).
Remove the bolts (5 nos.) and rear fender.
REAR FENDER
BOLTS
2-7
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
REAR WINKER
Remove mounting screws (2 nos.) from rear side fender RIGHT
set A and separate the rear side fender B. REAR SIDE
REAR SIDE
FENDER - B FENDER - A
SCREWS REAR WINKER

LEFT
SARI GUARD
Remove the mounting bolts (3 nos.) and sari guard.
SARI GUARD
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
BOLTS
SIDE STAND
Remove the spring.
Remove the pivot bolt/nut (1 nos.).
TORQUE: PIVOT BOLT
SPRING
Side stand pivot bolt : 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.3 lbf·ft)
Side stand lock nut: 39 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28.7 lbf·ft)
EXHAUST PIPE /MUFFLER

Remove the following:
–– Exhaust pipe joint nuts.
–– Muffler mounting bolts (1 no.), flange bolt (1 no.),
washer, collar and nut
–– Exhaust pipe/muffler
–– Gasket
2-8
Install a new gasket into the exhaust port.

GASKET
Install the exhaust pipe/muffler, then temporarily install the
Always replace exhaust pipe joint nuts, muffler mounting bolts, washer,
the exhaust pipe collar and nut.
gasket
with a new one Tighten the exhaust pipe joint nuts securely, then tighten
when remove the muffler mounting bolt to the specified torque.
the exhaust
pipe from the
engine.
NUT
COLLAR
JOINT
RUBBER NUTS
WASHER
EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER
MOUNTING BOLT
MUFFLER PROTECTOR
GASKET
The muffler Remove the pan screw of muffler protector.
protector can
be serviced Slide muffler protector towards engine to take it out.
with the muffler Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
installed on the
engine.
Always check
for the condition
of the rubber MUFFLER COVER
grommets on PAN SCREW
the muffler
protector.
STUD BOLT REPLACEMENT 20.5-22.5 mm

(0.81-0.89 in)
Thread two nuts onto the stud, and tighten them together,
then use a wrench on them to turn the stud bolt out.
Install new stud bolts into the cylinder head as shown.
After installing the stud bolts, check that the length from the
bolt head to the cylinder head surface is within specification.
STUD BOLT EMBED TO INCOMPLETE THREAD
2-9
MEMO
3. MAINTENANCE
SERVICE INFORMATION 3-1 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM 3-15
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 3-3
DRIVE CHAIN 3-16
FUEL LINE 3-4
BATTERY3-18
FUEL STRAINER SCREEN 3-4
BRAKE FLUID 3-18
THROTTLE OPERATION 3-5
CHOKE OPERATION 3-5
BRAKE PADS WEAR 3-20 3
BRAKE SYSTEM 3-21
AIR CLEANER 3-6
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH 3-22
CRANKCASE BREATHER 3-7
HEADLIGHT AIM 3-22
SPARK PLUG 3-7
CLUTCH SYSTEM 3-22
VALVE CLEARANCE 3-8
SIDE STAND 3-23
ENGINE OIL 3-10
SUSPENSION3-23
ENGINE OIL STRAINER SCREEN 3-12
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS 3-24
ENGINE OIL CENTRIFUGAL FILTER 3-12
WHEELS/TIRES3-24
ENGINE IDLE SPEED 3-14
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS 3-25
SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM 3-14
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Support the motorcycle on a level surface before starting any work.
• Gasoline is extremely flammable and is explosive under certain conditions.
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where the gasoline is stored can cause
fire or explosion.
• If the engine must be running to do some work, make sure the area is well ventilated. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area.
• The exhaust contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that may cause loss of consciousness and may lead to death. Run the
engine in an open area or with an exhaust evacuation system in an enclosed area.
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Throttle grip free play 2 ~ 6 mm (0.07 – 0.2 in)
Spark plug Standard CPR8EA-9 (NGK)
IN 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
Valve clearance EX 0.24 mm (0.010 in)
At draining 1.0 litre ( 1.0 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
Engine oil capacity At disassembly 1.2 litre ( 1.3 US qt, 1.1 Imp qt)
Honda 4-stroke oil or equivalent motor oil API service
Recommended engine oil classification: MA
Engine Idle speed 1,400 ± 100 min–1 (rpm)
Size/link 428/132
Drive chain 25 – 35 (0.984 – 1.37)
Slack
Clutch lever free play 10 – 20 (0.4 – 0.8)
Recommended brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4
Driver only 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi)
Front Driver and passenger 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi)
Cold tire
pressure Driver only 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi)
Rear Driver and passenger 200 kpa (2.00 kgf/cm², 29 psi)
Front 100/80-17 M/C 52S
Tire size Rear 140/70-17 M/C 66S
Front 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
Minimum tire thread depth Rear 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
3-1
MAINTENANCE
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Spark plug 31916 – KRM – 841 1 10 16 (1.6, 12) Page 3–7
Valve adjusting lock nut 90206 – 250 – 000 2 6 18 (1.8, 13.2) NOTE 1 Page 3–9
Timing hole cap 90084 – MN8 – 010 1 14 10 (1.0, 7) Page 3–10
Crankshaft hole cap 90087 – KSP – 860 1 32 15 (1.5, 11) NOTE 4 Page 3–10
Oil drain bolt 90131 – KRM – 840 1 12 30 (3.0, 22) Page 3–11
Oil filter rotor cover screw 93700 – 05012 – 0A 3 5 4 (0.4, 3.0) Page 3–13
Rear axle nut 90305 – KYJ – 711 1 16 88 (8.8, 65) U-Nut Page 3-16
Air cleaner cover screw 93903 – 25580 4 5 1.2 (0.1,0.9) Page 3-19
Headlight adjusting bolt 90102 – K43 – 900 1 4 2 (0.2,1.4) Page 3-22
Drive sprocket fixing plate bolt 90084 – 041 – 000 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) –
Side stand pivot bolt 90107 – GN1 – 010 1 10 10 (1.0, 7.3) –
Side stand lock nut 90304 – KTE – 911 1 10 39 (3.9, 28.7) –
Cylinder Head cover bolt 96001 – 06035 – 00 4 6 11 (1.1, 8.1) –
TOOLS
Valve Adjustment, 10 mm Gear Holder
070SR–TKS–PO18 07006–KRBT7900
3-2
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Perform the Pre-ride Inspection in the Owner’s Manual at each scheduled maintenance period.
I: Inspect and Clean, Adjust, Lubricate or Replace if necessary.
C: Clean R: Replace A: Adjust L: Lubricate.
The following items require some mechanical knowledge. Certain items (particularly those marked * and **) may require more technical
information and tools. Consult your Honda dealer.
WHICH EVER COMES FIRST
FREQUENCY ODOMETER READING (NOTE 1)
REFER
PRE-RIDE X1000Km 1 6 12 18 24 30 36 ANNUAL REGULAR
NOTE TO
CHECK X1000mi 0.6 4 8 12 16 20 24 CHECK REPLACE
PAGE
ITEM MONTHS 1 6 12 18 24 30 36
* FUEL LINE I I I I I I I Page 3-4
FUEL LEVEL I Page 3-4
* FUEL STRAINER SCREEN C C C C C C Page 3-4
* THROTTLE OPERATION I I I I I I I I Page 3-5
* CHOKE OPERATION I I I I I I I Page 3-5
* AIR CLEANER NOTE (2) R R Page 3-6
CRANKCASE BREATHER NOTE (3) C C C C C C Page 3-7
SPARK PLUG I R I R I R Page 3-7
* VALVE CLEARANCE I I I I I I Page 3-8
ENGINE OIL I R R R R R R R R Page 3-10
** ENGINE OIL STRAINER SCREEN C C C C Page 3-12
** ENGINE OIL CENTRIFUGAL FILTER C C C Page 3-12
* ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I I I I I Page 3-14
* SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM I I Page 3-14
* EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM I I Page 3-15
DRIVE CHAIN I EVERY 1000 Kms (600 mi) I, L Page 3-16
* BATTERY VOLTAGE I I I I I I I I I Page 3-18
BRAKE FLUID NOTE (4) I I I I I I I I 2 YEARS Page 3-18
BRAKE PADS WEAR (CBS) I I I I I I I I Page 3-20
BRAKE SHOES/PADS WEAR (STD) I I I I I I I I Page 3-20
BRAKE SYSTEM (CBS) I I I I I I I I Page 3-21
BRAKE SYSTEM (STD) I I I I I I I I I Page 3-21
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH I I I I I I I Page 3-22
HEAD LIGHT AIM I I I I I I I Page 3-22
LIGHTS/HORN I –
CLUTCH SYSTEM I I I I I I I I I Page 3-22
SIDE STAND I I I I I I I Page 3-23
* SUSPENSION I I I I I I I Page 3-23
* NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS I I I I I Page 3-24
** WHEELS/TIRES I I I I I I I I Page 3-24
** STEERING HEAD BEARINGS I I I I Page 3-25
* Should be serviced by an authorized Honda dealer, unless the owner has proper tools and service data and is mechanically qualified.
Refer to the official Honda Shop Manual
** In the interest of safety, we recommended these items be serviced only by your Honda dealer.
Notes:
1. At higher odometer readings, repeat at the frequency interval established here.
2. Service more frequently if the motorcycle is ridden in unusually wet or dusty areas.
3. Service more frequently when riding in rain or at full throttle.
4. Replacement requires mechanical skills.
3-3
MAINTENANCE
FUEL LINE
Remove the left side cover (page 2–3).
Replace the fuel line if it is cracked, damaged or leaking.
Inspect the fuel line routing, kinks and bends which can
restrict the fuel flow. Also inspect the position of clips used
for locking. Check fuel line and fuel strainer for blockage.
Install the left side cover (page 2–3).
FUEL LINE
FUEL STRAINER SCREEN

Wipe the spilled Remove Left side cover (page 2–3)
gasoline off at
Turn the fuel valve “OFF”.
once
Remove the fuel strainer cup and drain the contents of the
cup into a suitable container.
FUEL STRAINER CUP FUEL VALVE
Remove the O-ring and strainer screen.

Wash the strainer screen and cup in clean non-flammable STRAINER SCREEN
high flash point solvent.
Carefully install the strainer screen, new O-ring and fuel
strainer cup in the fuel valve body, making sure that the
O-ring is in place.
FUEL STRAINER CUP O-RING
Tighten the fuel strainer cup.

Turn the fuel valve “ON” and be sure there are no fuel leaks.
FUEL STRAINER CUP FUEL VALVE
3-4
MAINTENANCE
THROTTLE OPERATION
Check for smooth throttle grip full opening and automatic
full closing in all steering positions.
Check the throttle cable and replace it if it is deteriorated, 2-6 mm (0.08 -0.24 in)
kinked or damaged.
Inspect the throttle cable, if throttle operation is not smooth.
Measure the free play at the throttle grip flange.
FREE PLAY: 2 ~ 6 mm (0.07 – 0.2 in)
Throttle grip free play can be adjusted at either end of the
throttle cable.
Minor Adjustment: DUST COVER
Minor adjustments are made with the upper adjuster at

throttle housing adjuster.
Slide the dust cover from the adjuster.
Adjust the free play by loosening the lock nut and turning
the adjuster.
After adjustment, tighten the lock nut and reposition the
dust cover
Recheck the throttle operation. LOCK NUT ADJUSTER
Major Adjustment:
LOCK NUT
Major adjustment are made with the lower adjusting nut at
the carburetor end.
Remove the right side cover (page 2–3).
Loosen the lock nut and turn the adjusting nut. After
adjustment is complete, tighten the lock nut while holding
the adjusting nut.
Recheck the throttle operation.
ADJUSTING NUT
CHOKE OPERATION
• This motorcycle is equipped with a fuel enriching circuit
controlled by a starting enrichment (SE) valve.
• The SE valve opens the enriching circuit via a choke
cable when the choke lever is pulled.
Check for smooth operation of the choke lever.
Inspect the choke cable if the operation is not smooth.
Inspect the cable casing for cracks which could allow
moisture to enter.
Replace the cable if necessary CHOKE LEVER
3-5
MAINTENANCE
AIR CLEANER AIR CLEANER DUCT

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Remove the seat (page 2-3).
INSPECTION:
Air cleaner duct can be removed to do the visual inspection
of air cleaner element.
Clean the surrounding area of air filter with high pressure
air.
REPLACEMENT:
If found dirty, damaged or according to maintenance
schedule (page 3-3) replace air cleaner element by SCREWS
removing the air cleaner cover screws (4 nos.).
Remove the air cleaner element and packing.
Check the packing are in good condition, and replace it
if necessary.
Do not clean with solvent to remove dust and also do not

use forced air on it. The viscous oil will be lost and filter
becomes dry. As the base filter paper is coarse, it cannot
block fine dust when it becomes dry.
Replace the air cleaner if it is excessively dirty, torn or
damage.
Do not place filter horizontally on any surface as dust can
stick to the filter due to oil present. If necessary place
vertically. Install immediately after inspection.
Install the packing to the groove of the air cleaner element,

then install them by aligning its tab with the hole of the air ELEMENT
cleaner element holder.
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE
Air cleaner cover screw: 1.2 N.m (0.1 kgf.m, 0.9 Ibf.ft)
3-6
MAINTENANCE
CRANKCASE BREATHER
Service more frequently when ridden in rain, at full throttle,
or after the motorcycle is washed or overturned.
Check the crankcase breather hose for deterioration,
damage or loose connection. Make sure that the hoses
are not kinked, pinched or cracked.
BREATHER HOSE
Loosen the drain hose clip and remove the drain hose
from the air cleaner housing and drain deposits into a DRAIN HOSE CLIP
suitable container.
Reinstall the drain hose.
DRAIN HOSE
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL
Clean around Disconnect the spark plug cap.
the spark plug
base with
compressed air
before removing
the spark plug
cap, and make
sure no debris is
allowed to enter
SPARK PLUG CAP
the combustion
chamber.
Remove the spark plug using a equipped spark plug wrench

or an equivalent.
Inspect or replace the spark plug as described in the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3).
Replace it if necessary.
RECOMMENDED SPARK PLUG:
Standard: CPR8EA–9 (NGK)
SPARK PLUG
3-7
MAINTENANCE
INSPECTION
Check the following and replace if necessary (recommended
spark plug : page 3-7) CENTER ELECTRODE
• Insulator for damage
• Electrodes for wear
• Burning condition, coloration
–– Dark to light brown indicates good condition
–– Excessive lightness indicates malfunctioning ignition
system or lean mixture
–– Wet or black sooty deposit indicates over-rich INSULATOR
mixture
SIDE ELECTRODE
Clean the spark plug electrodes with a wire brush or special

plug cleaner.
0.8 - 0.9 mm
Check the gap between the center and side electrodes (0.03 - 0.04 in)
with a wire-type feeler gauge (wire gauge).
SPARK PLUG GAP: 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.03 – 0.04 in)
If necessary, adjust the gap by bending the side electrode
carefully by using the wire gauge.
INSTALLATION
Install and hand tighten the spark plug to the cylinder head,
then tighten the spark plug to the specified torque using a
equipped spark plug wrench or an equivalent.
Connect the spark plug cap securely.
SPARK PLUG SPARK PLUG CAP
VALVE CLEARANCE TIMING HOLE CAP

INSPECTION
Inspect and Remove the following:
adjust the valve –– Cylinder head cover (page 7-4)
clearance while
–– Spark plug (page 3-7)
the engine is
cold (below Remove the timing hole cap and crankshaft hole cap and
35°C/95°F). O-rings.
CRANKSHAFT HOLE CAP
3-8
MAINTENANCE
Rotate the crankshaft counter clockwise, and align the

“ ” mark on the flywheel with the index notch on the left INDEX NOTCH
T
crankcase cover.
Make sure the piston is at TDC (Top Dead Center) on the
compression stroke.
This position can be obtained by confirming that there is “ ” MARK
T
slack in the rocker arm. If there is no slack, it is because
the piston is moving through the exhaust stroke to TDC.
Rotate the crankshaft one full turn counter clockwise and
match up to the “ ” mark again.
Clean the feeler Check the valve clearance by inserting a feeler gauge
ADJUSTING SCREW
gauge with a between the adjusting screw and valve stem.
soft cloth before
VALVE CLEARANCE:
usage. When
checking the IN: 0.08 ± 0.02 mm (0.003 ± 0.001 in)
clearance, slide EX: 0.24 ± 0.02 mm (0.010 ± 0.001 in)
the feeler gauge
from the center Adjust by loosening the valve adjusting lock nut and turning
toward the the adjusting screw until there is slight drag on the feeler
outside. gauge. ADJUSTING
TOOL: Valve adjusting 10 mm (070SR–TKS-PO18) LOCK NUT
Apply clean engine oil to the valve adjusting lock nut

threads and seating surface. FEELER GAUGE
Hold the adjusting screw, and tighten the valve adjusting

lock nut to the specified torque.
Recheck the valve clearance.
Install the cylinder head cover (page 7-5) and apply the
specified torque.
Install the spark plug (page 3-8).
Apply clean engine oil to new O-rings, and install them to

each hole cap.
Apply grease to the crankshaft hole cap threads.
O-RINGS
CRANKSHAFT HOLE CAP
3-9
MAINTENANCE
Install and tighten the crankshaft hole cap to the specified

torque. TIMING HOLE CAP
Install and tighten the timing hole cap to the specified
torque.
CRANKSHAFT HOLE CAP
ENGINE OIL
OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
While checking Support the motorcycle on its center stand.
oil level take into
Start the engine and let it idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
consideration
not to screw Stop the engine and wait 2 – 3 minutes.
dipstick.
Remove the oil filler cap / dipstick, and wipe the oil from
the dipstick with a clean shop towel.
Reinstall the oil filler cap / dipstick, but do not screw it.
Remove the oil filler cap / dipstick.
OIL FILLER CAP/DIPSTICK
Check the oil level.
If the oil level is below or near the lower level line on the
dipstick, fill the recommended engine oil to the upper level
line through the oil filler hole.
UPPER
LOWER
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

Honda 4 – Stroke oil or equivalent motor oil
API service classification: MA
3-10
MAINTENANCE
Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring, and install it on oil

filler cap / dipstick.
Reinstall and tighten the oil filler cap/dipstick securely.
O-RINGS
DIPSTICK
ENGINE OIL CHANGE

Change the oil Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
with the engine
warm and the Stop the engine, and remove the oil filler cap/dipstick.
motorcycle
placed on its
center stand to
assure complete
and rapid
draining.
OIL FILLER CAP/DIPSTICK
Place a clean container under the engine.

Remove the oil drain bolt and sealing washer.
Drain the engine oil completely.
Install the oil drain bolt with a new sealing washer, and
tighten it to the specified torque.
BOLT SEALING WASHER
Fill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil

(page 3-10).
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY:
1.0 liters (1.0 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt) at draining
1.2 liters (1.3 US qt, 1.1 Imp qt) at disassembly
Check the engine oil level (page 3-10).
Start the vehicle and check for no oil leaks.
FILLER CAP/DIPSTICK
3-11
MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL STRAINER SCREEN

Be careful not to Remove the right crankcase cover (page 9-3).
damage the Oil
Pull the oil strainer screen out of the crankcase.
strainer screen.
Wash the oil strainer screen thoroughly in nonflammable
or high flash point solvent until all accumulated dirt has
been removed.
Blow dry it with compressed air to clean completely. Before
installing the strainer, it should be examined closely for
damage, and make sure the sealing rubber is in good
condition. OIL STRAINER SCREEN
Install the oil strainer screen with the thin edge facing in
and flange side facing up as shown. FLANGE SIDE
THIN EDGE
Install the right crankcase cover (page 9-5)
CRANKCASE
TICK EDGE
ENGINE OIL CENTRIFUGAL FILTER CLUTCH GEAR
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 9-3). GEAR PRIMARY DRIVE
GEAR
Remove the screws (3 Nos.) of oil filter by using gear holder HOLDER
between clutch gear and Gear Primary Drive. Also remove
oil filter rotor cap and gasket.
TOOL: Gear Holder 07006–KRBT900
SCREWS
OIL FILTER ROTOR CAP
Do not allow Clean the oil filter rotor cover and inside of the oil filter rotor
dust and dirt using a clean shop towel.
to enter the
oil passage in
the crankshaft.
Never use
compressed air
for cleaning.
OIL FILTER ROTOR
3-12
MAINTENANCE
Remove the gasket from the oil rotor cover.

While pressing the oil through from the reverse side, then
remove the clip. CLIP
COVER/GASKET
OIL THROUGH
Remove the oil through and spring from the oil filter rotor
cover. OIL FILTER ROTOR CAP
Blow and clean the oil through using compressed air.
Apply clean engine oil to the oil through surface, and install
the spring and oil through to the oil filter rotor cover.
OIL THROUGH
SPRING
While pressing the oil through from the reverse side, install
the clip.
Check the oil through operates freely, without binding. CLIP
Install a new gasket on to the oil rotor cover.
OIL THROUGH COVER/GASKET
Install and tighten the oil filter rotor cover screws by using
gear holder between clutch gear and Gear Primary Drive.
TORQUE: 4 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)
Install the right crankcase cover (page 9-5).
COVER/GASKET SCREWS
3-13
MAINTENANCE
ENGINE IDLE SPEED

• Inspect and adjust the idle speed after all other engine
maintenance items have been performed and are within
specifications.
• The engine must be warm for accurate adjustment. Ten
minutes of stop-and-go riding is sufficient.
Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature, shift
the transmission into neutral and place the motorcycle on
a level surface.
THROTTLE STOP SCREW
Connect a tachometer to the spark plug cable and select SPARK PLUG
THROTTLE STOP SCREW
the mode according to its manufacturer’s instructions. CABLE
Turn the throttle stop screw as required to obtain the
specified idle speed.
IDLE SPEED: 1,400 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
CONNECTOR
TACHOMETER

• The secondary air supply system introduces filtered
air into the exhaust gases in the exhaust port. Fresh
air is drawn into the exhaust port by the function of the
PAIR control valve.
• This charged of fresh air promotes burning of the
unburned exhaust gases, and changes a considerable
amount of hydrocarbons and carbon monoxide into
relatively harmless carbon dioxide and water vapour.
FRESH AIR
EXHAUST GAS
If the hoses Remove the fuel tank (page 2-3).

show any signs AIR SUPPLY HOSE
Check the air supply hose and vacuum hose for
of heat damage,
deterioration, damage or loose connections.
inspect the PAIR
check valve. Make sure that the hoses are not cracked.
VACUUM HOSE
3-14
MAINTENANCE
Check the air suction hose between the PAIR control valve
AIR SUCTION HOSE
and air cleaner housing for deterioration, damage or loose
connections.
Make sure that the hose is not cracked.
Remove and check the air suction hose.
If the carbon deposits in the air suction hose, check the
PAIR check valve.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM
The evaporative emission control system collects the fuel
vapor from the fuel tank and is stored in the canister with
more fresh air when the engine is at a stand still. These
vapours are directed to the engine via one way valve and
the carburetor when the engine is running.
The device helps in avoiding the air pollution caused due
to fuel vapours diffused into the air
The evaporative emission control system consist of two

main components:
CANISTER COMP.
• Canister component
• One way valve
ONE WAY FRESH AIR

VALVE
FUEL VAPOR
INSPECTION:
CANISTER
Remove the right side and left side cover. CHARGE TUBE FRESH AIR TUBE
Check the following hoses for deterioration, damage and

loose connection:
–– Fuel tank to EVAP canister hose.
–– EVAP Canister to one way valve hose
–– EVAP Canister breather hose
–– EVAP Canister drain hose
–– EVAP one way valve to carburetor hose.
Check also the EVAP canister and one way valve for cracks
or other damage. ONE WAY
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VALVE HOSE DRAIN TUBE
3-15
MAINTENANCE
DRIVE CHAIN
DRIVE CHAIN SLACK INSPECTION
Never inspect Turn the ignition switch “OFF”. Place the motorcycle on its
the drive chain center stand and shift the transmission into neutral.
while the engine
Check the slack at three places in the drive chain lower
is running.
run midway between the sprockets.
CHAIN SLACKNESS: 25 – 35 mm (0.9842 – 1.37 in)
Excessive chain slack, 50 mm (1.96 in) or more, may

damage the frame. 25-35 mm (0.9842 - 1.37in)
ADJUSTMENT
REAR AXLE SHAFT ADJUSTING NUT
Never adjust the Loosen the lock nut and then the adjusting nut until the
drive chain while correct drive chain slack is obtained.
the engine is LOCK NUT
Align the chain adjuster index marks with the rear edge of
running.
the adjusting slots.
INDEX MARK
Adjust the drive chain at minimum slack point.
REAR EDGE
Tighten the rear axle nut to the specified torque.

TORQUE: 88 N·m (8.8 kgf·m, 65 lbf·ft) LOCK NUT ADJUSTING NUT
Tighten both adjusting nuts and lock nuts. REAR AXLE NUT
Recheck the drive chain slack and free wheel rotation.

Check the rear brake pedal free play (page 3-20).
REAR EDGE INDEX MARK
CLEANING AND LUBRICATION

Turn off the ignition switch, place the motorcycle on its
center stand on a level ground and shift the transmission
into neutral.
DRIVE CHAIN
3-16
MAINTENANCE
Use any one of the following methods for lubricating drive

chain:
• SAE 80 or 90 gear oil
• Honda recommended chain maintenance spray
• Molten grease in greaselator
Saturate each chain link joint so that the lubricant
penetrates between the link plates, pins, bushings, and
rollers.
Wipe off the excess gear oil or grease.
If the drive chain becomes extremely dirty, it should be

removed and cleaned prior to lubrication. MASTER LINK
RETAINING CLIP
Remove the drive chain case (page 3-16).
Carefully remove the retaining clip with pliers.
Remove the master link, link plate and drive chain.
LINK PLATE
Clean the chain with non-flammable or high flashpoint SOFT BRUSH

NON-FLAMMABLE
solvent and wipe it dry.
OR HIGH FLASH
Be sure the chain has dried completely before lubricating. POINT SOLVENT
Lubricate the drive chain.
CLEANING
Wipe off the excess gear oil or grease.
WIPE AND
DRYING
LUBRICATE
GEAR OIL/
GREASE
INSPECTION
DRIVE CHAIN
Inspect the drive chain for possible damage or wear.
(N+1)PINS/(N) LINKS
Replace any chain that has damaged rollers, loose fitting
links, or otherwise appears unserviceable.
Measure the drive chain length with the chain held so that
all links are straight.
DRIVE CHAIN SPEC. :
NUMBER OF LINKS : 132
STANDARD LENGTH: 428 mm (16.85 in)
SERVICE LIMIT: 511 mm (20.11 in)
3-17
MAINTENANCE
SPROCKET
Installing a new chain on badly worn sprockets will cause
WEAR
a new chain to wear quickly.
Inspect the drive and driven sprocket teeth for wear or
damage, replace if necessary.
Never use a new drive chain on worn sprockets.
Both chain and sprockets must be in good condition, or the DAMAGE
new replacement chain will wear rapidly. NORMAL
Check the attaching bolts and nuts on the drive and driven
sprockets.
If any are loose, torque them.
Install the drive chain onto the sprockets.

MASTER LINK
Install the master link and link plate.
Install the retaining clip with its open end opposite to the
direction of chain travel.
LINK PLATE
RETAINING CLIP
BATTERY
It is not necessary to check the battery electrolyte level
or add distilled water as the battery is a maintenance free
sealed type.
Check the voltage of battery with FBT 50 tester (page 15-3).
Charging the battery (page 15-5).
Install the battery (page 15-3).
MF BATTERY
BRAKE FLUID
Spilled fluid can damage painted, plastic or rubber parts.
Place a rag over these parts whenever the system is
serviced. Keep a spray water bottle while working with
brake fluid.
• Do not mix different types of fluid, as they are not
compatible with each other.
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system when
filling the reservoir.
3-18
MAINTENANCE
FRONT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION:

Support the motorcycle on its center stand. SIGHT GLASS
Turn the handlebar to the left until the reservoir is parallel

to the ground.
Check the brake reservoir level through the sight glass.
• When the fluid level is near the lower level line, check
the brake pads for wear (page 3-20). A low fluid level
may be due to worn brake pads. If the brake pads
are worn, the caliper pistons are pushed out, and this
causes a low reservoir level.
• If the brake pads are not worn and fluid level is near the LOWER LEVEL LINE
lower level line, check entire system for leaks.
• As per maintenance schedule or if level found low re-

fill DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid in to the reservoir. For SCREWS RESERVOIR COVER
re-filling remove the following:
–– Screws
–– Reservoir cover
–– Set plate
–– Diaphragm
Install in the reverse order of removal and tighten the cover
screws to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft) SET PLATE/
DIAPHRAGM
REAR BRAKE (CBS)

UPPER LEVEL LINE
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION:
Support the motorcycle on its center stand.
Check the rear brake fluid level mounted in rear step pillion.
• When the fluid level is near the lower level line, check
the brake pads for wear (page 3-20). A low fluid level
may be due to worn brake pads. If the brake pads
are worn, the caliper pistons are pushed out, and this
causes a low reservoir level.
• If the brake pads are not worn and fluid level is near the
lower level line, check entire system for leaks. LOWER LEVEL LINE
As per maintenance schedule or if level found low re-fill

DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid in to the reservoir. For re-filling SCREWS RESERVOIR COVER
remove the following:
–– Screws
–– Reservoir cover
–– Set plate
–– Diaphragm
Install in the reverse order of removal and tighten the cover
screws to the specified torque.
SET PLATE
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft) DIAPHRAGM
3-19
MAINTENANCE
REAR BRAKE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT:

STD
No rear brake Check the brake pedal and brake rod for loose connections,
free play adjust- excessive play, or other damage. Repair or replace if
ment required necessary.
in CBS varient
due to rear disc Measure the rear brake pedal free play.
brakes. Free Play: 20 – 30 mm (0.787 – 1.178 in)
20-30 mm
Adjust the rear brake pedal free play by turning the

adjusting nut half-turn at a time.
Apply the brake several times and check for free wheel BRAKE ARM
rotation after the brake pedal is released.
Recheck the free play and adjust the brake light switch
(page 3-22).
BRAKE
ARM PIN
ADJUSTING NUT
1. Make sure the cut-out on the adjusting nut is seated

on the brake arm pin when adjusting the free-play.
2. Push the brake arm to confirm that there is a gap
between the rear brake adjusting nut and brake
arm pin.
3. Do not turn the adjuster beyond its natural limits. GAP
CUT OUT CORRECTLY SEATED
CUT OUT NOT SEATED
BRAKE PAD WEAR PADS

FRONT BRAKE PADS (CBS)
Check the brake pads for wear by locking from the front
side of the brake caliper.
Replace the brake pads if either pad is worn to the bottom
of wear limit groove.
Refer to the brake pad replacement (page 14-7).
3-20
MAINTENANCE
FRONT BRAKE PADS (DISC)

PADS
side of the brake caliper.
REAR BRAKE PADS (DISC)

side of the brake caliper. PADS
REAR BRAKE SHOES (DRUM) REFERENCE MARK ARROW

Check the wear indicator position when the brake is
applied.
If the arrow on the indicator plate aligns with the reference
mark on the brake panel, inspect the brake drum
(page 14-30).
Replace the brake shoes (page 14-31) if the drum I.D. is
within the service limit.
BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKE HOSES/

CBS TYPE
FITTINGS
FRONT BRAKE
Inspect the brake hose and fittings for deterioration, cracks
and signs of leakage.
Tighten any loose fittings.
Replace hoses and fittings as required.
Firmly apply the brake lever, and check that no air has
entered the system.
If the lever feels soft or spongy when operated, bleed the
air from the system.
Refer to the brake bleeding procedures (page 14-4).
3-21
MAINTENANCE
REAR BRAKE
FITTING BRAKE HOSES
DISC TYPE:
Inspect the brake hose and fittings for deterioration, cracks
and signs of leakage.
Tighten any loose fittings.
Replace hoses and fittings as required.
Refer to the brake bleeding procedures (page 14-4).
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH BRAKE LIGHT

SWITCH BODY
Hold the brake • The front brake light switch does not require adjustment.
light switch body • Adjust the rear brake light switch.
and turn the
Remove the right side cover.
adjuster. Do not
turn the brake Adjust the brake light switch so that the brake light comes
light switch on just prior to the to the brake actually being engaged.
body.
If the light fails to come on, adjust the switch so that the
light comes on at the proper time.
ADJUSTER
HEADLIGHT AIM
Adjust the Place the motorcycle on a level ground. ADJUSTING BOLT
headlight beam
Adjust the headlight beam vertically by loosening the
as specified by
headlight adjusting bolt.
local laws and
regulations. After adjusting the headlight aim, tighten the headlight
adjusting bolt to the specified torque.
CLUTCH SYSTEM
INSPECTION
Check the cable and clutch lever for any looseness,
excessive play, or other damage. 10-20 mm (0.4-0.8 in)
Replace or repair them if necessary.

Inspect the clutch cable for kinks or damage, and lubricate
the cable.
Measure the clutch lever free play at the tip of the clutch
lever.
FREE PLAY: 10 – 20 mm (0.4 – 0.8 in)
3-22
MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTING NUT LOCK NUT
Adjustments are performed at the clutch lifter arm.
Loosen the lock nut, and turn the adjusting nut.
After adjustment, tighten the lock nut by holding adjusting
nut.
Check the clutch operation.
If the proper free play cannot be obtained, or the clutch
slips during the test ride, disassemble and inspect the
clutch (page 9-8).
SIDE STAND
Check the side stand spring for damage or loss of tension.
Check the side stand operation for freedom of movement
and lubricate the side stand pivot if necessary.
Make sure the side stand is not bent.
SIDE STAND
SPRING
SUSPENSION
FRONT SUSPENSION INSPECTION
Loose, worn Check the action of the forks by operating the front brake,
or damaged and pressing the front suspension several times.
suspension
Check the entire assembly for signs of leaks, damage or
parts impair
loose fasteners.
motorcycle
stability and Replace the damaged components which cannot be
control. repaired.
Tighten all nuts and bolts.
Refer to (page 12-14) for fork service.
REAR SUSPENSION INSPECTION

Loose, worn Check the action of the rear shock absorber by pressing
or damaged the rear end several times.
suspension
Check the entire shock absorber assembly for signs of
parts impair
leaks, damage or loose fasteners.
motorcycle
stability and Replace the damaged components which can not be
control. repaired.
Tighten all nuts and bolts.
Refer to (page 13-12) for shock absorber service.
3-23
MAINTENANCE
Support the motorcycle securely and raise the rear wheel

off the ground.
Check for worn swingarm bearings by grabbing the rear
wheel and attempting to move the wheel and attempting
to move the wheel side to side.
Replace the bearings if any looseness to noted.
Refer to (page 13-13) for swingarm service.
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS

Check that all chassis nuts, bolts and screws are tightened
to their correct torque values (page 1-10).
Check that all cotter pins, clips, hose clamps and cable
stays are in place and properly secured.
WHEELS/TIRES
FRONT WHEEL
Support the motorcycle on its center stand, and raise the
front wheel off the ground.
Check for worn wheel bearings by holding the fork leg, and
attempting to move the wheel side to side.
Replace the bearings if any looseness is noted.
Refer to the front wheel bearings replacement
(page 12-10).
REAR WHEEL
Check for worn wheel and driven flange bearings by
holding the swingarm, and attempting to move the wheel
side to side.
Replace the bearings if any looseness is noted.
Refer to each bearing replacement:
–– Rear wheel bearings (page 13-6)
–– Driven flange bearing (page 13-10)
3-24
MAINTENANCE
Check the tire pressure with a tire pressure gauge when

the tires are cold.
RECOMMENDED TIRE PRESSURE AND TIRE SIZE:
FRONT REAR
175 175
Tire pressure Driver only
(1.75,25) (1.75,25)
kPa (kgf/cm2,
Driver and 175 200
psi)
Passenger (1.75,25) (2.00,29)
100/80- 140/70-
Tire size
17M/C 52S 17M/C 66S
Check the tires for cuts, embedded nails, or other damage.

Check the trueness of each wheel:
–– Front wheel (page 12-10)
–– Rear wheel (page 13-4)
Replace the tires when the tread depth (TWI) reaches the
following limits.
MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH:
FRONT: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
REAR: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Measure the tread depth at the center of the tires.
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS

Support the motorcycle on its center stand, and raise the
front wheel off the ground.
Check that the control cables do not interfere with
handlebar rotation.
Check that the handlebar moves freely from side to side.
Check that the fork leg moves freely from forward to

backward.
If the handlebar or fork moves unevenly, binds, or has
vertical movement, inspect the steering head bearings
(page 12-23).
3-25
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

ROCKER ARM
CAMSHAFT
OIL FILTER ROTOR
CRANKSHAFT
OIL PUMP
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
4-0
4. LUBRICATION SYSTEM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM 4-0 ENGINE OIL STRAINER SCREEN 4-2
SERVICE INFORMATION 4-1 OIL PUMP 4-2
TROUBLESHOOTING4-1
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
4
Used engine oil may cause skin cancer if repeatedly left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods. Although this is unlikely
unless you handle used oil on a daily basis, it is still advisable to thoroughly wash your hands with soap and water as soon as
possible after handling used oil.
• The oil pump can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
• The service procedures in this section must be performed with the engine oil drained.
• When removing and installing the oil pump, use care not to allow dust or dirt to enter the engine.
• If any portion of the oil pump is worn beyond the specified service limits, replace the oil pump as an assembly.
• After the oil pump has been installed, check that there are no oil leaks.
• Refer to the following:
–– Engine oil level check (page 3-10)
–– Engine oil change (page 3-11)
–– Engine oil strainer screen cleaning (page 3-12)
–– Engine oil centrifugal filter cleaning (page 3-12)
SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
At draining 1.0 liter (1.0 US qt, 0.9 lmp qt) –
Engine oil capacity At disassembly 1.2 liter (1.3 US qt, 1.1 lmp qt) –
Honda 4-stroke oil or equivalent motor oil
Recommended engine oil API service classification: MA –
Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
Tip clearance 0.15 (0.006) 0.20 (0.008)
Oil pump rotor Body clearance 0.15 – 0.20 (0.006 – 0.008) 0.25 (0.010)
Side clearance 0.05 – 0.10 (0.002 – 0.004) 0.15 (0.006)
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Oil pump plate screw 93901 – 34120 1 4 3 (0.3, 2.2) Page 4-6
Oil pump mounting bolt 95701 – 06035 – 00 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine oil level too low
• High Oil consumption
• External oil leaks
• Worn valve guide or seal
• Worn piston rings or incorrect piston ring installation
• Worn cylinder
Engine oil contamination
• Oil not changed often enough
• Clogged oil strainer
• Faulty cylinder head gasket
• Worn piston rings Poor performance
• Deformed exhaust system
• Clogged muffler
4-1
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL STRAINER SCREEN

REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 9-3).
Remove the oil strainer screen.
OIL STRAINER SCREEN
Coat the screen rubber with engine oil and install it at

original direction. FLANGE SIDE THIN EDGE
CRANKCASE
TICK EDGE
OIL PUMP
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 9-3).
Remove the oil pump driven gear and rotor shaft assembly.
DRIVEN GEAR ROTOR SHAFT
Remove the oil pump mounting bolts (2 nos.) and oil pump
assembly.
MOUNTING BOLTS
4-2
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Remove the dowel pins (2 nos.).
DOWEL PINS
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the oil pump cover screw (1 no.) and oil pump PUMP COVER
cover.
SCREW
Remove the inner rotor.
INNER ROTOR
Remove the outer rotor from the oil pump body.
OUTER ROTOR
4-3
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
INSPECTION BODY CLEARANCE

• Measure at several places and use the largest reading
to compare to the service limit.
• If any portion of the oil pump is worn beyond the
specified service limits, replace the oil pump and oil
pump cover as an assembly. Remove both side shroud
pan screw (1 no.).
Temporarily install the outer rotor, inner rotor and rotor shaft
into the oil pump body.
Measure the oil pump body clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.25 mm (0.010 in)
Measure the rotor tip clearance between the inner and

outer rotors. TIP CLEARANCE
Remove the rotor shaft.

SIDE CLEARANCE
Measure the side clearance using a straight edge and
feeler gauge.
4-4
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
ROTOR SHAFT
DRIVEN GEAR
PUMP BODY
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
PUMP COVER
3 N.m (0.3 Kgf.m, 2.2 Ibf.ft)
Apply clean engine oil to the outer rotor and install it into
the oil pump body.
OUTER ROTOR
Apply clean engine oil to the inner rotor and install them.
INNER ROTOR
4-5
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Install the oil pump cover and tighten the screw.

PUMP COVER
SCREW
INSTALLATION
Install two dowel pins into the crankcase.
DOWEL PINS
Install the oil pump and tighten the mounting bolts to the
specified torque. OIL PUMP
TORQUE: 12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9 lbf.ft)
MOUNTING BOLTS
Apply clean engine oil to the oil pump driven gear teeth
and rotor shaft then align and install it.
DRIVEN GEAR ROTOR SHAFT
4-6
MEMO
FUEL SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION
27 N.m (2.8 kgf.m, 20 Ibf.ft)
5-0
5. FUEL SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION 5-0 CARBURETOR5-6
SERVICE INFORMATION 5-1 PILOT SCREW ADJUSTMENT 5-15
TROUBLESHOOTING5-2 SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM 5-19
AIR CLEANER HOUSING 5-3 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM5-20
STARTING ENRICHMENT(SE) VALVE 5-5 FUEL STRAINER 5-22
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Bending or twisting the control cable will impair smooth operation of secondary air supply system, and could cause the cable
5
to stick or bind, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where gasoline is stored can cause a
fire or explosion.
• When disassembling the fuel system parts, note the locations of the O-rings. Replace them with new ones on reassembly.
• Before removing the carburetor, place an approved gasoline container under the carburetor drain tube, loosen the drain screw,
and drain the fuel from the carburetor.
• After removing the carburetor, wrap the intake port of the engine with a shop towel or cover it with pieces of tape to prevent
any foreign material from dropping into the engine.
• If the motorcycle is to be stored for more than one month, drain the float chamber. Fuel left in the float chamber may cause
clogged jets, resulting in hard starting or poor driveability.
SPECIFICATIONS
Carburetor identification number AVK6BA Page 1–3
Main jet #118 Page 5–11
Slow jet #38 Page 5–11
Pilot screw initial opening 2 1/8 Page 5–18
Float level 13.0 mm (0.51in) Page 5–12
Engine Idle speed 1,400 ± 100 min–1 (rpm) Page 5–18
Throttle grip free play 2 ~ 6 mm (0.07 – 0.2 in) Page 3–5
PAIR control valve specified vacuum 53.3 kPa (400 mm Hg) Page 5–20
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Fuel tank mounting bolt 95701 – 06012 – 00 2 8 27 (2.8, 20) –
SE valve lock nut 16046 – KVC – 901 1 10 2.3 (0.2, 1.7) Page 5–6
Carburetor drain screw – 1 6 1.5 (0.2, 1.1) Page 5–6
Slow jet 16180 – K38 – 901 1 5 1.5 (0.1, 1.1) Page 5–11
Needle jet holder 16165 – K21 – 901 1 7 2.5 (0.25, 1.8) Page 5–11
Main jet 99101 – KTN – 118 1 5 2.1 (0.2, 1.6) Page 5–11
Float chamber screw 93500 – 04012 – 0H 3 4 2.1 (0.2, 1.6) Page 5–12
SE valve cover screw 93892 – 05012 – 18 2 5 3.4 (0.4, 2.5) Page 5–13
Vacuum chamber cover screw 93500 – 04008 – 1H 2 4 2.1 (0.2, 1.6) Page 5–14
Throttle cable stay screw 93500 – 05012 – 1H 2 5 3.4 (0.34, 2.5) Page 5–14
Insulator band screw 16217 – KSP – 910 1 5 1 (0.1, 0.7) Page 5–15
Fuel valve lock nut 16950 – K43 – 901 1 16 22 (2.2, 16) Page 5–23
5-1
TOOLS
Carburetor float level gauge
070MJ-001-I110
TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine won’t start After burn when engine braking is used
• Too much fuel getting to the engine • Lean mixture in slow circuit
– Air cleaner clogged • Faulty PAIR control valve
– Flooded carburetor • Faulty PAIR check valve
• Intake air leak • Clogged hose of the secondary air supply system
• Fuel contaminated/deteriorated • Ignition system malfunction (page 16-3)
• No fuel to carburetor Backfiring or misfiring during acceleration
– Fuel strainer clogged • Ignition system malfunction
– Fuel hose clogged • Fuel mixture too lean
– Fuel valve stuck Poor performance (driveability) and poor fuel economy
– Float level faulty • Fuel system clogged
Lean mixture • Ignition system malfunction
• Fuel jet clogged
• Float valve faulty
• Float level too low
• Fuel line restricted
• Clogged carburetor air vent hose
• Intake air leak
• Throttle valve faulty
Rich mixture
• SE valve in open position
• Float valve faulty
• Float level too high
• Air jets clogged
• Air cleaner element contaminated
• Flooded carburetor
Engine stall, hard to start, rough idling
• Fuel line restricted
• Ignition system malfunction (page 16-3)
• Fuel mixture too lean/rich (pilot screw adjustment)
• Fuel contaminated/deteriorated
• Intake air leak
• Idle speed misadjusted
• Float level faulty
• Pilot screw misadjusted
FUEL SYSTEM
AIR CLEANER HOUSING RR BRAKE LIGHT BREATHER HOSE
REMOVAL SWITCH
AIR VENT HOSE
–– Fuel tank (page 2-3)
–– Air cleaner element (page 3-6)
Disconnect the air vent hose (page 5-5) from the carburetor
and remove the hoses (Breather and air vent) from the
frame clamps.
Disconnect the RR brake switch 2P connector as well as
remove the wire routing from the frame clamp.
CLAMP
Disconnect the crank case breather hose.
BREATHER HOSE
Disconnect the ASV hose.

ASV HOSE
Loosen the air cleaner connecting boot band screw.

Remove the mounting bolts (2 nos.) from right side.
BOLTS
BAND SCREW
5-3
FUEL SYSTEM
Remove the mounting bolt (1 no.) from left side.

Remove the air cleaner housing from right side.
BOLT
AIR CLEANER
HOUSING
INSTALLATION
Install the air cleaner housing from right side to the frame.
Install and tighten the mounting bolt (1 no.) from left side.
BOLT
AIR CLEANER
HOUSING
Install the mounting bolts (2 nos.) from right side. 300

Take care of Connect the crankcase breather hose.
the direction of
the band screw Connect the air cleaner connecting boot and tighten the
while installing band screw.
as shown. BAND
SCREW
BOLTS
BREATHER HOSE
Route all hoses Connect the air secondary valve (ASV) hose.
as shown on ASV HOSE
page (1-18 to
1-24).
5-4
FUEL SYSTEM
Clamp the hose to the frame carefully and connect the air
While installing vent hose to the carburetor (page 5-16). RR BRAKE LIGHT BREATHER HOSE
the drain hose SWITCH
route the Carefully route the wire from the clamp on the air cleaner AIR VENT HOSE
wire harness housing and connect the rear brake light switch 2P
connector.
properly
page (1-18) Install the following:
–– Air cleaner element (page 3-6)
–– Left side cover (page 2-3)
CLAMP
STARTING ENRICHMENT (SE) VALVE SE VALVE LOCK

NUT/ SE VALVE
CARBURETOR
Remove the fuel tank right cover. (page 2-4).
Loosen the air cleaner connecting boot band screw and
insulator band screw from carburetor.
Loosen the starting enrichment (SE) valve lock nut and
remove the SE valve from the carburetor body. INSULATOR
SCREW
BAND SCREW
Check the SE valve for scoring , scratches or wear.

Check the seat at the tip of the SE valve for stepped wear.
Replace the SE valve set if necessary.
SE VALVE
When installing new SE valve, compress the spring and

release the choke cable and spring from the SE valve. SPRING
Install the SE valve to the choke cable.
SE VALVE
CHOKE CABLE
5-5
FUEL SYSTEM
Handle the SE Install the SE valve to the carburetor body. SE VALVE LOCK CARBURETOR
valve lock nut NUT/ SE VALVE
Tighten the SE valve lock nut.
with care that
can easily be TORQUE: 2.3 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.7 lbf·ft)
damaged.
After the installation, check for the smooth operation of
the choke lever.
7-9 mm
Install the fuel tank (page 2-4). (0.3-0.04 in)
Install the left side cover (page 2-3)
300
INSULATOR
BAND SCREW SCREW
CARBURETOR SE VALVE LOCK THROTTLE SENSOR

3P CONNECTOR
NUT/ SE VALVE
REMOVAL AIR VENT
Remove the fuel tank right side cover (Page 2-4). HOSE
7-9 mm
Loosen the insulator band screw and air cleaner connecting (0.3-.04 in)
boot band screw. INSULATOR
BAND SCREW
Disconnect the SE valve (page 5-5).
SCREW
Disconnect the air vent hose and the throttle sensor 300
3P connector (page 16-7).
Turn the fuel valve “OFF”, and disconnect the fuel hose
from the carburetor. CARBURETOR
Loosen the drain screw and drain the fuel from the float
chamber into the approved gasoline container.
Completely drain any residual fuel, tighten the drain screw
to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)
Disconnect the drain hose from the carburetor.
DRAIN HOSE DRAIN SCREW
Loosen the throttle cable lock nut and disconnect the

throttle cable end from the throttle drum. LOCK NUT
CABLE END THROTTLE DRUM
5-6
FUEL SYSTEM
Disconnect the one way valve hose.

CARBURETOR INSULATOR
Remove the carburetor. SCREW
BAND ONE WAY

SCREW VALVE HOSE
DISASSEMBLY THROTTLE CABLE STAY

THROTTLE CABLE STAY
Remove the two screw and throttle cable stay.
SCREWS
VACUUM CHAMBER
VACUUM CHAMBER COVER
Take care of the Remove the two screws and vacuum chamber cover.
spring as the
compression
spring is very
long, it will
jump out of the
carburetor when
the cover is
removed.
SCREWS
Remove the compression spring and diaphragm/ vacuum

DIAPHRAGM/
piston from the carburetor body.
VACUUM PISTON
COMPRESSION SPRING
5-7
FUEL SYSTEM
Turn the needle holder counterclockwise and remove it.

NEEDLE HOLDER DIAPHRAGM/
VACUUM PISTON
Be careful not Remove the spring and jet needle from the vacuum piston.
to damage the
Check the following:
diaphragm. JET NEEDLE
–– Jet needle for stepped wear
–– Vacuum piston for wear or damage
–– Diaphragm for pin holes, deterioration or damage
–– Spring for wear or damage SPRING
–– Needle holder for damage NEEDLE
Replace the damage parts, if necessary. HOLDER
DIAPHRAGM/
VACUUM PISTON
FLOAT
Remove the screws (3 nos) float chamber.
SCREWS
FLOAT CHAMBER
Pull out the float pin.

FLOAT PIN
5-8
FUEL SYSTEM
Remove the float and float valve.

FLOAT
FLOAT VALVE
JETS NEEDLE JET MAIN JET

Damaged Remove the followings: HOLDER SLOW JET
pilot screw –– Main jet
seat will occur
if the screw –– Slow jet
is tightened –– Needle jet holder
against the seat. Before removing the pilot screw, record the number of turns
until it seats lightly, then remove the pilot screw, spring,
washer and O-ring SPRING
WASHER/
O-RING
PILOT SCREW
Check the each jet for wear of damage.

NEEDLE JET
Check the pilot screw, spring washer and O-ring for wear HOLDER
or damage.
Replace the damaged parts, if necessary.
O-RING
WASHER
SPRING
SLOW JET
PILOT SCREW MAIN JET
STARTING ENRICHMENT (SE) VALVE COVER

SE VALVE COVER SE VALVE COVER
Remove the two screws/washers.
Remove the valve cover and O-ring.
Check the O-ring for deteriorated or damage.
Check the starting enrichment (SE) valve cover and SE
valve air passage.
If air passage is clogged, blow open with compressed air.
SCREWS/
WASHERS O-RING
5-9
FUEL SYSTEM
CARBURETOR CLEANING
Blow open the fuel passage from the valve seat side with
compressed air and clean the strainer screen. STRAINER SCREEN
VALVE SEAT
Blow open each air and fuel passages in the carburetor

CARBURETOR BODY
body using compressed air.
Check each part for wear or damage, and replace them
if necessary.
CARBURETOR ASSEMBLY
FLOAT PIN FLOAT VALVE
VACUUM 2.1 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.6 lbf·ft)
CHAMBER
COVER FLOAT
3.4 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 2.5 lbf·ft)

DRAIN SCREW
1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, FLOAT
STAY
SPRING 1.1 lbf·ft) O-RING CHAMBER
GASKET
NEEDLE
HOLDER 2.1 N·m (0.2 kgf·m,
1.6 lbf·ft)
SPRING
SE VALVE
COVER
JET NEEDLE
SPRING
WASHER O-RING
DIAPHRAGM/
VACUUM PISTON WASHER O-RING
SPRING PILOT SCREW 3.4 N·m
(0.4 kgf·m, 2.5 lbf·ft)
THROTTLE STOP NEEDLE JET HOLDER
SCREW 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)
SLOW JET
1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft) MAIN JET
2.1 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.6 lbf·ft)
5-10
FUEL SYSTEM
JETS
Damage to the Install the pilot screw with the spring, washer and new
pilot screw seat O-ring, and return it to its original position as noted during
will occur if removal.
the pilot screw Perform the pilot screw adjustment if a new pilot screw is O-RING
is tightened installed (page 5-15).
against the seat.
WASHER
SPRING
O-RING
PILOT SCREW
Handle the Install the following:

jets with care, –– Needle jet NEEDLE JET
they can easily HOLDER
–– Needle jet holder
be scored or
scratched –– Main jet
–– Slow jet
TORQUE:
Needle jet holder: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)
Main jet: 2.1 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.6 lbf·ft)
Slow jet: 1.5 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)
SLOW JET
MAIN JET
FLOAT
VALVE SEAT
Check the tip of the float valve where it contacts the valve
seat for stepped wear or contaminated.
Replace the valve if the tip is worn or contaminated.
Check the operation of the float valve.
Inspect the float valve seat for scores, scratches clogging
and damage.
If the seat is damaged, replace the carburetor body.
FLOAT VALVE
Install the float valve to the float.

FLOAT
Install the float to the carburetor body.
FLOAT VALVE
5-11
FUEL SYSTEM
Install the float pin through the carburetor body and float.
FLOAT PIN
With the float valve seated and float arm just touching the
FLOAT LEVEL
valve, then measure the float level using the special tool
GAUGE
as shown.
FLOAT LEVEL: 13.0 mm (0.51 in)
TOOL:
Carburetor float level gauge 070MJ–001–I110
The float cannot be adjusted.
Replace the float assembly if it the float level is out of
specification.
Install a new O-ring into the float chamber groove. Install

the float chamber. FLOAT CHAMBER
O-RING
Install and tighten the float chamber screws to the specified

torque.
SCREWS
FLOAT CHAMBER
5-12
FUEL SYSTEM
STARTING ENRICHMENT (SE) VALVE COVER

SE VALVE COVER SE VALVE COVER
Install the the new O-ring and SE valve cover.
Install the two screws/washers.
Tighten the screws.
SCREWS/
O-RING WASHERS
VACUUM CHAMBER
Install the jet needle into the diaphragm/vacuum piston.
JET NEEDLE
Install the spring onto the needle holder and set the needle
holder into the vacuum piston.
SPRING
NEEDLE
HOLDER
DIAPHRAGM/
VACUUM PISTON
Turn the needle holder clockwise while pressing it until it

NEEDLE HOLDER DIAPHRAGM/
locks.
VACUUM PISTON
Holder flanges and piston grooves should be fitted after
turning.
Align
Be careful not to Install the diaphragm/vacuum piston into the carburetor

DIAPHRAGM/
damage the jet body by aligning the tab of the diaphragm with the groove
VACUUM PISTON
needle. of carburetor body.
Lift the bottom of the piston with your finger to set the TAB
diaphragm tab into the groove of the carburetor body.
Install the compression spring and vacuum chamber over
by lifting the piston in place.
COMPRESSION SPRING
5-13
FUEL SYSTEM
Be careful not Check that the spring installed correctly by pushing the COMPRESSION SPRING
to pinch the bottom of the piston with your finger and make sure that
diaphragm the piston returns back in place smoothly.
under the
chamber cover,
and to keep
the spring
straight when
compressing the
spring.
VACUUM PISTON
Install the 2 screws of the vacuum chamber cover before

VACUUM CHAMBER COVER
releasing the vacuum piston.
Tighten the two screws.
SCREWS
Install the two screws and throttle cable stay. THROTTLE CABLE STAY
Tighten the two screws.
SCREWS
INSTALLATION CARBURETOR INSULATOR

Take care of Install the carburetor to the connecting hose and insulator. SCREW
the direction of
the band screw Loosely tighten the insulator band screw and air cleaner
while installing connecting boot band screw.
as shown. Connect the one way valve hose.
BAND ONE WAY

SCREW VALVE HOSE
5-14
FUEL SYSTEM
Connect the throttle cable end to the throttle drum and

tighten the lock nut. LOCK NUT
Check the throttle operation (page 3-5).
CABLE END THROTTLE DRUM
Connect the drain hose to the carburetor.
DRAIN HOSE DRAIN SCREW
After installation Connect the air vent hose and throttle sensor 3P connector
SE VALVE LOCK THROTTLE SENSOR
turn the fuel to the carburetor.
NUT/ SE VALVE 3P CONNECTOR
valve “ON” and
Connect the fuel hose to the carburetor. AIR VENT
make sure these
are no fuel Install the SE valve (page 5-5). HOSE
7-9 mm
leaks. (0.3-.04 in)
Tighten the insulator band screw so that the band ends
clearance is 7 - 9 mm (0.3 - 0.4 in). INSULATOR
BAND SCREW
SCREW
Tighten the connecting boot band screw. 300
CARBURETOR
PILOT SCREW ADJUSTMENT

• The pilot screw is correctly adjusted at the factory. As
the adjustment of the pilot screw is very critical for the
emission of CO and HC gases, such an adjustment
shall be carried out very carefully.
• Place the motorcycle on its center stand on a level
surface.
• Use a tachometer with graduations of 50 min1 (rpm)
or smaller with graduations of 50 min3 (rpm) change.
• If the CO measurement tool is available, perform
the adjustment by CO concentration measurement
procedure.
5-15
FUEL SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT BY CO CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT PROBE
PIPE
• Check the following items before inspection.
–– Air cleaner (page 3-6)
–– Crankcase breather (page 3-7)
–– Secondary air supply system (page 5-19)
–– Ignition timing (page 16-5)
1. Connect an appropriate pipe or hose (heat-resistant,
chemical-resistant) to the muffler so that the probe can
be inserted by more than 60 cm (0.24 in) 60 cm (0.24 in)
2. Connect a tachometer according to the tachometer
manufacturer’s instructions.
Damage to the 3. Remove the left side cover (page 2-3).
pilot screw seat PILOT SCREW
4. Disengage the canister comp.
will occur if
the pilot screw Turn the pilot screw clockwise until it seats lightly, and then
is tightened back it out to the specification given.
against the seat.
INITIAL OPENING: 2 & 1/8 turns out.
4. Warm up the engine for 10 minutes at idle speed.

• Do not warm up the engine by running the motorcycle.
The catalytic converter will act and affect the
measurement.
Be careful if Measure the engine oil drain bolt temperature.

using water DRAIN BOLT TEMPERATURE: 600 - 650C
thermometer,
the
measurement
may be
affected by the
atmospheric
temperature. DRAIN BOLT
5. Adjust the idle speed with the throttle stop screw.

THROTTLE
STOP SCREW
5-16
FUEL SYSTEM
6. Insert the probe into the muffler and measure the

carbon-mono-oxide (CO%) concentration. CO MEASUREMENT TOOL
CO measurement at idle: 0.7 – 0.8%

If the CO concentration is exist, adjust the pilot screw as
following.
7. Disconnect the vacuum hose of PAIR control valve, then

VACUUM HOSE
it connect the vacuum pump and plug the vacuum port.
Apply the specified vacuum to the PAIR control valve
vacuum hose more than 53.3 kPa (400 mm Hg) (make
sure the secondary air does not supply).
VACUUM
PUMP
PLUG
When PAIR 8. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
system stop,
idle speed will
change. If the idle speed is out of specification, adjust the idle
speed by turning the throttle stop screw with the PAIR
system stopped.
THROTTLE
STOP SCREW
9. Turn the pilot screw and adjust the CO concentration.

CO MEASUREMENT TOOL
CO measurement at idle: (secondary air does not
supply) 1.5 - 3.8 %
10. Disconnect the plug from the vacuum port, then remove
the vacuum pump and connect the vacuum hose of PAIR
control valve.
Start the engine.
Adjust the idle speed with the throttle stop screw if
necessary.
Measure the CO concentration again.
CO measurement at idle: 0.7 - 0.8%
If the CO concentration is exist, check the secondary air
supply system (page 5-19).
5-17
FUEL SYSTEM
IDLE DROP PROCEDURE

1. Remove the left side cover (page 2-3) PILOT SCREW
Damage to
the pilot screw
Turn the pilot screw until it seats lightly, then back it out to
seat will occur
the specification given.
if the screw
is tightened This is an initial setting prior to the final pilot “screw
against the seat. adjustment. “
INITIAL OPENING: 2 & 1/8 turns out
Reference 2. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
engine oil 3. Stop the engine and connect the tachometer, according
temperature: to the manufacturer’s instructions.
60o - 65oC
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose of PAIR control valve, then

VACUUM HOSE
it connect the vacuum pump and plug the vacuum port.
Apply the specified vacuum to the PAIR control valve
vacuum hose more than 53.3 kPa (400 mm Hg) (make
sure the secondary air does not supply).
VACUUM
PUMP
PLUG
5. Start the engine and adjust the idle speed with the
throttle stop screw.
6. Turn the pilot screw in or out slowly to obtain the highest
engine speed.
7. Lightly open the throttle 2–3 times, then adjust the idle
speed with the throttle stop screw.
8. Turn the pilot screw in gradually until the engine speed
drops by 100 min-1 (rpm).
9. Turn the pilot screw outward to final opening. THROTTLE
FINAL OPENING: 1/2 turns out from the position STOP SCREW
obtained in step 8
10. Disconnect the plug from the vacuum port, then remove
the vacuum pump and connect the vacuum hose of PAIR
control valve.
11. Readjust the idle speed with the throttle stop screw.
5-18
FUEL SYSTEM

HOSE
SYSTEM INSPECTION
Warm up to the engine to normal operating temperature.
Disconnect the air suction hose from the air cleaner
housing.
Check the air suction hose port is clean and free carbon
deposits.
If the port is carbon fouled, check the PAIR control valve.
PORT
Disconnect the air suction hose from the resonator air

chamber.
AIR SUCTION HOSE VACUUM PUMP
Then check the air suction hose is clean and free of carbon
deposits. VACUUM HOSE
Disconnect the vacuum hose of PAIR control valve then
it connect the vacuum pump and plug the vacuum port
Start the engine and open the throttle slightly to be certain
that air is sucked in through the air suction hose.
If the air is not drawn in, check the air suction hose for
clogging.
With the engine running, gradually apply vacuum to the
PAIR control valve vacuum hose.
Check that the air suction hoses stop drawing air and that
the vacuum hose not bleed.
SPECIFIED VACUUM: 53.3 kPa (400 mm Hg)
If the air is drawn in or if the specified vacuum is not
maintained, install a new PAIR control valve.
PLUG
PAIR CHECK VALVE INSPECTION VALVE COVER

• Remove the following:
–– PAIR control valve (page 5-20)
–– Two screws
–– Valve cover
–– Pair check valve.
Check the valve reed for fatigue or damage, replace the
PAIR control valve if necessary.
Replace the PAIR control valve if the seat rubber is cracked,
deteriorated or damaged, or if there is clearance between
the reed and seat. SCREWS CHECK VALVE
5-19
FUEL SYSTEM
PAIR CONTROL VALVE AIR SUPPLY HOSE

REMOVAL /INSTALLATION
Disconnect the PAIR control valve vacuum hose and air
supply hose.
VACUUM HOSE
Disconnect the air suction hose.

Remove the bolts, nuts (2 nos.) and PAIR control valve.
BOLTS
AIR SUCTION
HOSE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM
The evaporative emission control system consist of two
main components:
• One way valve
• Canister component
ONE WAY VALVE SMALLER DIA

Remove the right side cover (page 2-3).
Remove the both hoses of the one way valve.
Remove one way valve from stay.
ONE WAY
VALVE
VACUUM HOSE
5-20
FUEL SYSTEM
INSPECTION SMALLER DIA

Air must flow from bigger opening (from canister) to smaller AIR FLOW
opening (to carburetor) not in reverse direction.
• Don’t use compressed high pressure air for

inspection.
• Don’t drop the one way valve, if dropped replace.
ONE WAY
Connect one way valve to the hoses with its arrow mark VALVE
facing upwards.
VACUUM HOSE
CANISTER COMPONENT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION HOSE
Remove the both side covers (page 2-3). CANISTER
Disconnect the hoses from right side from the canister

component.
Remove the starter motor cable (page 10-8).

STARTER MOTOR CANISTER
Pull out the canister from its stay. CABLE
HOSE
INSPECTION CANISTER CANISTER

RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE
check for cracks or fissures on the body of the canister
component and replace if necessary if falling out of
emission norms.
• The canister must be installed at its original position

to avoid damage of performance.
• Do not bend, twist or kink the tube.
HOSE CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION
5-21
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL STRAINER
REMOVAL
Drain the fuel from the fuel tank into the approved gasoline
container.
Remove the screw and plastic fuel valve knob.
SCREWS
FUEL KNOB
Make sure not Remove the fuel tank (page 2-4).

to damage LOCK NUT
Loosen the fuel valve lock nut.
painted surface
of fuel tank
Remove the fuel strainer and fuel valve assembly from

the fuel tank. FUEL VALVE
Remove the fuel strainer and O-ring from the fuel valve.
FUEL STRAINER
O-RING
CLEANING
Clean the fuel strainer with compressed air.
FUEL STRAINER
5-22
FUEL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
FUEL VALVE
Install a new O-ring onto the fuel strainer, and install the
fuel strainer into the fuel valve.
Install the fuel strainer and fuel valve assembly into the FUEL STRAINER
fuel tank.
O-RING
Tighten the fuel valve lock nut and apply the specified
Torque. LOCK NUT

Install the fuel tank (page 2-4).
Install the fuel valve knob while aligning the fuel valve tab
with the know hole.
FUEL VALVE KNOB FUEL VALVE
Align
Install and tighten the screw.

Install the left side cover (page 2-3).
SCREWS
FUEL KNOB
5-23
COMPONENT LOCATION
54 N.m (5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf.ft)
12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9 Ibf.ft)
45 N.m (4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf.ft)
6-0
6. ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMPONENT LOCATION 6-0 ENGINE REMOVAL 6-2
SERVICE INFORMATION 6-1 ENGINE INSTALLATION 6-4
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When removing/installing the engine, tape the frame around the engine beforehand for frame protection.
• The following components can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
–– Oil pump (page 4-2)
–– Cylinder head / valves (page 7-1)
–– Cylinder / piston (page 8-2)
–– Clutch (page 9-6)
–– Gearshift linkage (page 9-12)
6
–– Alternator (page 10-1)
• The following components require engine removal for service.
–– Crankcase/transmission/kickstarter (page 11-1)
SPECIFICATIONS
After draining. 1.0 liter (1.0 US qt, 0.9 lmp qt) Page 3–11
Engine oil capacity After disassembly 1.2 liter (1.3 US qt, 1.1 lmp qt) Page 3–11
Engine dry weight 29.4 kg (65.03 lbs) –
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Front engine hanger nut 95801 – 10090 – 00 4 10 45 (4.5, 33) Page 6–5
Rear engine hanger nut 90019 – 399 – 010 2 10 54 (5.5, 37.6) Page 6–5
Drive sprocket fixing plate bolt 90084 – 041 – 000 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 6–5
6-1
ENGINE REMOVAL VS SENSOR NEUTRAL SWITCH

Support the motorcycle on its center stand. CONNECTORS WIRE CONNECTOR
Drain the engine oil (page 3-11).
Remove exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-8)
Disconnect the following:
–– Spark plug cap (page 3-7)
–– Clutch cable (page 9-6)
–– Carburetor (page 5-6)
–– ASV air supply hose (page 3-14)
Disconnect the neutral switch wire connector, ignition IGNITION PULSE
pulse generator wire connector, alternator 2P (white) GENERATOR 2P (WHITE)
connector and VS sensor connector (3 nos.). Disconnect CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
the crankcase breather hose.
Disconnect the 2 terminals of the starter motor by removing

NUT
nut and bolt. TERMINALS
Replace the bolt and nut after disconnecting the terminal.
BOLTS
Loosen the rear axle nut.

AXLE NUT AXLE SHAFT
Loosen the both side drive chain adjusting lock nut and
adjusting nut.
Push the rear wheel forward and make a drive chain slack
fully.
ADJUSTING NUT
LOCK NUT
LOCK NUT
Remove the kickstarter pedal pinch bolt and kickstarter

pedal.
KICKSTARTER
PINCH BOLT PEDAL
6-2
Remove the gear shift pedal pinch bolt and gear shift pedal.
PINCH BOLT
PEDAL
Remove the bolts (2 nos.) of choke cable stay. CHOKE CABLE STAY
BOLTS
Remove the bolts (2 nos.) of left crankcase rear cover and LEFT CRANKCASE
remove it with bracket. REAR COVER
BRACKET
Remove the fixing plate bolts (2 nos.), fixing plate and drive
sprocket with chain. CHAIN
BOLTS
FIXING PLATE DRIVE SPROCKET
6-3
The jack Support the engine using a jack or other adjustable support FRONT ENGINE
height must to ease of engine hanger bolts removal. HANGER BOLTS/NUTS
be continually
adjusted to
relieve stress –– Front engine hanger bolts and nuts
for ease of bolt –– Plate bolts and nuts
removal. –– Front engine hanger plate BOLTS/ NUTS
PLATE
During engine Remove the rear engine hanger bolts and nuts first lower
removal, hold then upper.
the engine
Remove the engine from the frame.
securely not
to damage
the frame and
engine. use
masking tape on
frame to save
from scratches.
BOLTS/NUTS
ENGINE INSTALLATION
• Place the jack or other adjustable support under the
engine.
• The jack height must be continually adjusted to relieve
stress for ease bolt installation.
• Carefully align the mounting points with the jack to
prevent damage to engine, frame, wires and cables.
• All the engine mounting bolts and nuts loosely install,
then tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
• Route the wires and cables properly.
During engine Place the engine in the frame.

installation,hold
Install the rear engine hanger bolts and nuts, but do not
the engine
tighten it yet.
securely and
be careful not
to damage
the frame and
engine.
BOLTS/NUTS
6-4
Install the plate, plate bolts and nuts.

FRONT ENGINE
Install the front engine hanger bolts and nuts. HANGER BOLTS/NUTS
Tighten the front and rear engine hanger nuts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE:
BOLTS/ NUTS
Front engine hanger nut : 45 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
Rear engine hanger nut : 54 N.m (5.5 kgf.m, 37.6 lbf·ft)
PLATE
Install the drive chain onto the drive sprocket.

CHAIN Align
Install the drive sprocket to the counter shaft.
Install the fixing plate.
Rotate the fixing plate, and align the holes in the fixing plate
with the bolts hole in the drive sprocket.
Tighten the drive sprocket fixing plate bolts (2 nos.) to the

specified torque. CHAIN
BOLTS
Install the left crankcase rear cover and bracket. LEFT CRANKCASE
REAR COVER
BRACKET
6-5
Install and tighten the bolts (2 nos.) on left crankcase rear CHOKE CABLE STAY
cover.
Install the choke cable stay and tighten the bolts (2 nos.).
BOLTS
LEFT CRANKCASE
REAR COVER
Install the gear shift pedal and tighten the pinch bolt.
PINCH BOLT
PEDAL
Install the kickstarter pedal by aligning mark on the kick

spindle.
Install and tighten the pinch bolt.
Align KICKSTARTER
PINCH BOLT PEDAL
Connect the 2 terminals of the starter motor.

NUT
TERMINALS
BOLTS
6-6
Connect the crank case breather hose.

VS SENSOR NEUTRAL SWITCH
Connect the neutral switch wire connector, pulse generator CONNECTORS WIRE CONNECTOR
wire connector, alternator 2P (white) connector and VS
sensor connectors.
Connect and install the following:
–– ASV air supply hose (page 3-14)
–– Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-8)
–– Carburetor (page 5-14)
–– Spark plug cap (page 3-7)
Inspect the following:
IGNITION PULSE
–– Drive chain slack (page 3-15) GENERATOR 2P (WHITE)
–– Clutch lever free play (page 3-22) CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Fill the crankcase with recommended engine oil to the
proper level (page 3-10).
6-7
COMPONENT LOCATION
10 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.3 Ibf.ft)
9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 6.6 Ibf.ft)
30 N.m (3.0 kgf.m, 22 Ibf.ft)
12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9 Ibf.ft)
9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 6.6 Ibf.ft)
7-0
7. CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
COMPONENT LOCATION 7-0 CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL 7-10
SERVICE INFORMATION 7-1 CYLINDER HEAD/
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY7-12
TROUBLESHOOTING7-2
CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION 7-19
CYLINDER COMPRESSION 7-4
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER LIFTER 7-21
CYLINDER HEAD COVER 7-4
CAMSHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 7-6
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the cylinder head, valves, rocker arms and camshaft. These services can be done with the engine
installed in the frame.
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces when removing the cylinder head cover and cylinder head. Do not strike the
cylinder head cover and cylinder head too hard during removal.
7
• When disassembling, mark and store the disassembled parts to ensure that they are reinstalled in their original locations.
• Clean all disassembled parts with cleaning solvent, and dry them by blowing them off with compressed air before inspection.
• Camshaft and rocker arm lubricating oil is fed through oil passages in the cylinder head (stud bolt hole), camshaft holder and
cylinder head cover. Clean the oil passages before assembling them.

Cylinder compression at 650 min–1 (rpm) 1300 kPa (13.2 kgf/cm², 188.5 psi) – Page 7–4
IN 0.08 (0.003) – Page 3–9
Valve clearance
EX 0.24 (0.010) – Page 3–9
IN 4.975 – 4.990 (0.1958 – 0.1964) 4.92 (0.194) Page 7–13
Valve stem O.D.
EX 4.955 – 4.970 (0.1950 – 0.1956) 4.90 (0.193) Page 7–13
Valve, Valve guide I.D. IN/EX 5.000 – 5.012 (0.1969 – 0.1973) 5.04 (0.198) Page 7–14
valve guide IN 0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015) 0.07 (0.003) Page 7–14
Stem-to-guide clearance
EX 0.030 – 0.057 (0.0012 – 0.0022) 0.09 (0.004) Page 7–14
Valve seat width IN/EX 0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043) 1.5 (0.06) Page 7–15
INNER 35.59 (1.415) 35.14 (1.383) Page 7–13
Valve spring Free length
OUTER 39.46 (1.553) 38.60 (1.519) Page 7–13
Shaft O.D. IN/EX 9.988 – 10.000 (0.3926 – 0.3936) 9.91 (0.390) Page 7–11
Rocker arm
Arm to shaft clearance OUTER 0.002 – 0.049 (0.0001 – 0.0019) 0.10(0.004) Page 7–11
IN 34.46 – 34.54 (1.356 – 1.359) 32.96 (1.298) Page 7–8
Camshaft Cam lobe height
EX 34.29 – 34.37 (1.349 – 1.353) 32.85 (1.293) Page 7–8
Cylinder head warpage – 0.05 (0.002) Page 7–13
7-1
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Cylinder head cover bolt 96001 – 06035 – 00 4 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) Page 7–6
Rocker arm shaft bolt 90002 – KRM – 840 2 5 5 (0.5, 3.7) Page 7–12
Cam sprocket bolt 90083 – KRM – 840 2 5 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 7–9
Cylinder stud bolt nuts 90201 – KRE – G00 4 9 30 (3.0, 22) NOTE 1 Page 7–19
Inlet pipe bolt 95701 – 06025 – 00 2 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 7–21
Cam chain tensioner lifter screw 90005 – K15 – 900 1 6 4 (0.4, 3.0) Page 7–22
Cylinder stud bolt 90031 – KRE – G00 2 9 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 7–19
90032 – KRE – G00 2 9 9 (0.9, 6.6) Page 7–19
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Engine top-end problems usually affect engine performance. These problems can be diagnosed by a compression test, or by tracing
top-end noise with a sounding rod or stethoscope.
• If the performance is poor at low speeds, check for white smoke in the crankcase breather hose. If the hose is smoky, check for a
seized piston ring (page 3-7).
Compression too low, hard starting or poor performance at low speed
• Valves:
–– Incorrect valve adjustment
–– Burned or bent valve
–– Incorrect valve timing
–– Weak valve spring
–– Uneven valve seating
–– Valve stuck open
• Cylinder head:
–– Leaking or damaged cylinder head gasket
–– Warped or cracked cylinder head
–– Loose spark plug
• Cylinder/piston problem
Compression too high
• Excessive carbon buildup on piston head or combustion chamber
Excessive smoke
• Worn valve stem or valve guide
• Damaged stem seal
Excessive noise
• Incorrect valve adjustment
• Sticking valve or broken valve spring
• Excessive worn valve seat
• Worn or damaged camshaft
• Worn rocker arm and/or shaft
• Worn rocker arm roller and valve stem end
• Worn cam sprocket teeth
• Worn cam chain
• Worn or damaged cam chain tensioner
Rough idle
• Low cylinder compression
7-2
TOOLS
Valve guide driver Valve spring compressor Valve Seat cutter, 27.5 mm (45° EX)
070-GD-0061150 070-GE-001-I100 070GH-0031180
Valve Seat cutter, 29 mm (45° IN) Flat cutter, 27 mm (32° EX) Flat cutter, 30 mm (32° IN)
07780-0010300 07780-0013300 07780-0012200
Interior cutter, 26 mm (60° EX) Interior cutter, 30 mm (60° IN) Cutter holder
07780-0014500 07780-0014000 070GH-0051150
Valve guide reamer Tensioner lifter stopper

070GH-0011160 070MG-0010100
7-3
CYLINDER COMPRESSION
Reference PLUG CAP SPARK PLUG
Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
engine oil
Stop the engine, disconnect the spark plug cap, and
temperature:
remove the spark plug (Page 3-7).
60 – 65°C
(140 –149°F)
To avoid Install a compression gauge attachment into the spark

discharging plug hole. USING KICK START
the battery, do
Connect a compression gauge to the attachment.
not operate the
starter motor TOOL:
for more than 5
Compression gauge attachment 07RMJ-MY50100 or
seconds.
equivalent commercially available
Ensure battery
in fully charge Turn the ignition switch ON.
state incase Shift the transmission into neutral.
done by self Open the throttle all the way and crank the engine with the
start method. kickstarter until the gauge reading stops rising.
COMPRESSION
COMPRESSION PRESSURE: GAUGE
1300 kPa (13.2 kgf/cm², 188.5 psi) at 650 min-1(rpm)
If compression is high, it indicates that carbon deposits
have accumulated on the combustion chamber and/or USING SELF START
the piston crown.
If compression is low, pour 3 – 5 cc (0.1 – 0.2 oz) of lean
engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole
and recheck the compression.
If the compression increases from the previous value,
check the cylinder, piston and piston rings.
–– Blown cylinder head gasket
–– Improper valve clearance adjustment
–– Worn piston ring / Cylinder and piston
COMPRESSION
If compression is the same as the previous value, GAUGE
check the valves for leakage.
CYLINDER HEAD COVER AIR SUPPLY HOSE
REMOVAL
Remove the both side covers (Page 2-3).
Disconnect the air supply hose (Page 3-14).
Remove the bolts (4 nos.).
BOLTS
7-4
Remove the cylinder head cover and cover packing. PACKAGING

Remove the PAIR passage O-ring from the cylinder head
cover.
HEAD COVER
O-RING
Remove the two bolts. O-RING

Remove the air supply pipe and O-ring.
BOLTS
INSTALLATION O-RING
Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring.
Install the new O-ring to the air supply pipe.
Install the air supply pipe to the cylinder head cover.
Install and tighten the two bolts. BOLTS
Clean the oil passages of the cylinder head cover using

compressed air.
O-RING
7-5
Install a new cover packing into the cylinder head cover PACKAGING O-RING
groove.
Install the cylinder head cover onto the cylinder head.
HEAD COVER
Install and tighten the head cover bolts to the specified AIR SUPPLY HOSE
torque.
TORQUE : 10 N.m (1.1 kgf.m, 7.3 Ibf.ft)
BOLTS
CAMSHAFT BOLTS
REMOVAL
Remove the following: PAN SCREW
–– Choke cable stay (page 10-2)
–– Cylinder head cover (page 7-4)
Remove the head cover cylinder L–side by removing bolts L COVER
(3 nos.).
Make sure the piston is at TDC (Top Dead Center) on the O-RING
compression stroke (page 3-9).
Remove the tensioner lifter plug and O-ring.
Turn the tensioner shaft clockwise with the stopper tool to
retract the tensioner, then insert the stopper fully to hold
the tensioner in the fully retracted position.
TOOL:
STOPPER TOOL
Tensioner lifter stopper 070MG-0010100
7-6
Remove the cam sprocket mounting bolts (2 nos.).
BOLTS
Be careful not to Remove the cam sprocket off the camshaft flange.
let the sprocket CAM CHAIN
Remove the sprocket from the cam chain.
bolts fall into the
crankcase.
CAMSHAFT FLANGE SPROCKET
Hold the cam chain with a piece of wire to prevent it from

falling into the crankcase.
Remove the camshaft retainer bolt (1 no.). RETAINER BOLT
NOTE:
CAMSHAFT
Do not hammer the cam shaft out as it can damage the
camshaft.
Remove the camshaft.
CAMSHAFT
7-7
INSPECTION
BEARING
CAMSHAFT BEARING
Turn the outer race of each bearing with your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly. Also check
that the bearing inner race fits tightly on the camshaft.
Replace the camshaft if the bearings do not turn smoothly,
quietly, or if they fit loosely on the camshaft.
CAM LOBE
Measure the height of each cam lobe.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 32.96 mm (1.298 in)
EX: 32.85 mm (1.293 in)
Inspect the cam lobe for damage or excessively worn.
Inspect the oil passages and rocker arms for wear or EXHAUST
damage if necessary.
INTAKE
INSTALLATION
Apply clean engine oil to the camshaft bearings and cam BEARING
lobes.
Make sure the tab of camshaft is facing upward.

CAMSHAFT HOLDER
Install the camshaft into the camshaft holder.
CAMSHAFT
7-8
Install the camshaft retainer bolt and tighten it securely.

Install the cam sprocket to the cam shaft.
RETAINER BOLT
CAMSHAFT
Install the cam chain on cam sprocket.

Install the cam sprocket on the camshaft flange. CAM CHAIN
Install the cam sprocket mounting bolts (2 nos.) to the

specified torque.
BOLTS
Install the following: AIR SUPPLY HOSE

–– Tensioner lifter plug and O-ring
–– Choke cable stay (page 10-3)
Install the head cover cylinder L–side by installing the
bolts (3 nos.).
BOLTS/RUBBER SEALS
7-9
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL

Remove the following : BOLTS
–– Exhaust pipe (page 2-8)
–– Camshaft (page 7-6)
Remove bolts (2 nos.) of the intake manifold from cylinder
head.
Remove flange bolts (2 nos.). STUD BOLTS/NUTS

Loosen the nut (4 nos.) and loosen the stud bolt (4 nos.).
FLANGE
BOLTS
Remove the stud bolts, nuts and washers (4 nos. each).

STUD BOLTS/
NUTS
! CAUTION
Place a shop towel over the cylinder head opening to avoid
the washers to fall down into the crankcase.
7-10
Remove the cylinder head.
CYLINDER HEAD
Remove the gasket and dowel pins. DOWEL PINS
GASKET
ROCKER ARM
REMOVAL SHAFT
–– Exhaust pipe (page 2-8) BOLTS
–– Remove Cam sprocket (page 7-7)
–– Remove the camshaft (page 7-7)
–– Head cover cylinder L-Side (page 7-6)
Remove the bolts (2 nos.) and rocker arms from the
cylinder head. ROCKER ARM
INSPECTION ROCKER ARM

ROCKER ARM/SHAFT
ROLLER
Inspect the sliding surface of each rocker arm and shaft
for wear or damage.
Check the each rocker arm roller for scoring, scratches
or evidence of insufficient lubrication and oil hole for clog.
Measure each rocker arm shaft O.D.:
Calculate the rocker arm-to-shaft clearance:
SHAFT
7-11
Clean the threads of each rocker arm shaft thoroughly.

Apply clean engine oil to each rocker arm inner, roller
surface and rocker arm shaft rotating surface. SHAFT
Set the rocker arm into the camshaft holder in the direction
as shown, then install the rocker arm shaft with the threads
facing the cam sprocket side into the cylinder head through BOLTS
the rocker arm.
Insert the rocker arms shaft fully into the grooves and
tighten the bolts as per the specified torque.
ROCKER ARM
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY/ COTTERS

ASSEMBLY
To prevent loss While compressing the valve spring using the special tool,
of tension,do remove the valve cotters.
not compress
TOOL:
the valve spring
more than Valve spring compressor 070GE-001-I100
necessary to
remove the
cotters.
VALVE SPRING
COMPRESSOR
Arrange all the Loosen the valve spring compressor and remove the
parts so they following:
can be placed –– Cotters VALVE
back in their
–– Spring retainers STEM SEAL
original
locations. –– Valve spring
SPRING
–– Stem seals
RETAINER
–– Spring seats
–– Intake and exhaust valve
SPRINGS VALVE
SEAT COTTERS
SPRINGS
Remove the carbon deposits from the combustion chamber.

Clean off any gasket material from the cylinder head
surface.
COMBUSTION CYLINDER HEAD

CHAMBER SURFACE
7-12
INSPECTION
VALVE SPRING
Measure the valve spring free length.
SERVICE LIMIT:
INNER: 35.14 mm (1.383 in)
OUTER: 38.60 mm (1.519 in)
CYLINDER HEAD
Be careful not Check the spark plug hole and valve area for cracks. Check
to damage the the cylinder head for warpage with a straight edge and a
gasket surface. feeler gauge.
VALVE
Inspect the valve for trueness, burning scratches or
abnormal stem wear.
Measure the valve stem O.D.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 4.92 mm (0.194 in)
VALVE
EX: 4.90 mm (0.193 in)
Insert each valve into the valve guide and check the valve
movement in the guide.
VALVE GUIDE
VALVE GUIDE REAMER
Always rotate Ream the valve guide to remove the carbon build-up before
the reamer checking the valve guide.
clockwise,never
TOOL:
counter
clockwise Valve guide reamer 07984-MA60001
when installing,
removing and
reaming.
7-13
Measure and record each valve guide I.D. with a ball gauge
or inside micrometer.
SERVICE LIMIT: IN/EX: 5.04 mm (0.198 in)
Calculate the stem-to-guide clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: IN: 0.07 mm (0.003 in)
EX: 0.09 mm (0.004 in)
• If the stem-to-guide clearance exceeds the service limit,
determine if a new guide with standard dimensions
would bring the clearance within tolerance. If so replace
the guides as necessary and ream to fit.
• If the stem-to-guide clearance still exceeds the service
limit with new guides, replace the valve and guide.
• Reface the valve seat whenever new valve guides are
installed.
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
Chill the replacement valve guides in the freezer section
of a refrigerator for about an hour.
Heat the cylinder head to 130°C – 140°C (275°F –290°F)
with a hot plate or oven. Do not heat the cylinder head
beyond 150°C (300°F). Use temperature indicator sticks,
available from welding supply stores, to be sure the cylinder
head is heated to the proper temperature.
• Wear insulated gloves to avoid burns when handling
the heated cylinder head.
• Using a torch to heat the cylinder head may cause
warping.
• Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
Support the cylinder head and drive the valve guides
and clips out of the cylinder head from the combustion
chamber side. VALVE GUIDE DRIVER
TOOL:
Valve guide driver 07942-8920000
While the cylinder head is still heated, take off the new
valve guides from the freezer and install the new clips to
the new guides.
Drive new guides in the cylinder head from the camshaft VALVE GUIDE DRIVER
side.
TOOL:
Valve guide driver 07942-8920000
After installing the valve guides, measure the valve guide
height from the cylinder head.
SPECIFIED HEIGHT: 16.8 – 17.0 mm (0.66 – 0.67 in)
Let the cylinder head cool to room temperature.
CLIP
7-14
Ream the new valve guides.

VALVE GUIDE REAMER
TOOL:
Valve guide reamer 07984-MA60001
• Take care not to tilt or lean the reamer in the guide while
reaming. Otherwise, the valve is installed slanted, that
causes oil leaks from the stem seal and improper valve
seat contact and results in the valve seat refacing not
able to be performed.
• Insert the reamer from the combustion chamber side
of the head and always rotate the reamer clockwise.
• Use cutting oil on the reamer during this operation.
Clean the cylinder head thoroughly to remove any metal
particles after reaming and reface the valve seat.
VALVE SEAT INSPECTION HAND LAPPING TOOL
Clean the intake and exhaust valves thoroughly to remove
the carbon deposits.
Apply light coating of Prussian Blue to the valve seats.
Tap the valves and seats using a rubber hose or other
hand lapping tool.
Remove the valve and inspect the width of each valve seat.
The valve seat contact should be within the specified width
and even all around the circumference.
STANDARD: 0.9 – 1.1 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in)
Valve seat width is not within specification, reface the valve
seat (page 7-16).
SEAT WIDTH
Inspect the valve seat face for:

• Damaged face:
–– Replace the valve and reface the valve seat.
• Uneven seat width:
–– Bent or collapsed valve stem;
–– Replace the valve and reface the valve seat.
DAMAGED FACE UNEVEN SEAT WIDTH
7-15
The valve can- • Contact area (too high or too low area)
not be ground- –– Reface the valve seat.
ed. If the valve
face is burned
or badly worn or
if it contacts the
seat unevenly,
replace the
valve.
TOO LOW TOO HIGH
VALVE SEAT REFACING

Follow the Valve Seat Cutters, a grinder or equivalent valve seat
refacing refacing equipment are recommended to correct a worn
manufacture’s valve seat.
operating 45°
instructions.
60°
32°
If the contact area is too high on the valve, the seat must
be lowered using a 32 degree flat cutter. CONTACT TOO HIGH OLD SEAT
WIDTH
If the contact area is too low on the valve, the seat must
be raised using a 60 degree inner cutter.
32°
CONTACT TOO LOW OLD SEAT

WIDTH
60°
Reface the Use a 45 degree cutter to remove the roughness or

valve seat with irregularities from the seat.
a 45 degree
TOOLS: ROUGHNESS
cutter when a
valve guide is Seat cutter, 27.5 mm (EX) 07780-0010200
replaced. Seat cutter, 29 mm (IN) 07780-0010300
Cutter holder 07781-0010400
VALVE SEAT CUTTER
7-16
Using 32 degree cutter, remove top 1/4 of the existing

valve seat material.
TOOLS:
Flat cutter, 27 mm (EX) 07780-0013300
OLD SEAT
Flat cutter, 30 mm (IN) 07780-0012200 WIDTH
32°
Using 60 degree cutter, remove the bottom 1/4 of the old

seat.
OLD SEAT WIDTH
Remove the cutter and inspect the area you have just
removed.
TOOLS:
Interior cutter, 26 mm (EX) 07780-0014500
Interior cutter, 30 mm (IN) 07780-0014000
60°
Install a 45 degree finish cutter and cut the seat to proper

width.
Make sure that all pitting and irregularities are removed. SEAT WIDTH
Refinish if necessary.
STANDARD SEAT WIDTH:
0.9 – 1.1 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in)
45°
After cutting the seat, apply lapping compound to the valve

HAND LAPPING TOOL
face and lap the valve using light pressure.
• Excessive lapping pressure may deform or damage
the seat.
• Change the angle of lapping tool frequently to prevent
uneven seat wear.
• Lapping compound can cause damage if it enters
between the valve stem and guide.
After lapping, wash any residual compound off the cylinder
head and valve.
Recheck the seat contact after lapping.
7-17
ASSEMBLY
COTTERS
SPARK PLUG
16 N.m (1.6 kgf.m, 12 lbf.ft)
SPRING RETAINER
VALVE SPRINGS
SPRINGS SEAT
STEM SEAL
VALVE GUIDE
CLIP
EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE VALVE
To avoid Clean the cylinder head assembly with solvent and blow
damage to the through all oil passage with compressed air.
seal, turn the
Install the valve seats and new valve stem seals.
valve slowly VALVE
STEM SEAL
when inserting. Lubricate each valve stem with molybdenum oil solution.
Insert the intake and exhaust valve into the valve guides. SPRING
RETAINER
SPRINGS VALVE
SEAT COTTERS
SPRINGS
Install the valve springs and retainers. The springs tightly

wound coils should face toward the combustion chamber.
COMBUSTION CHAMBER SIDE
7-18
Grease the Compress the valve spring and install the valve cotters.
cotters to ease COTTERS
TOOL:
installation. To
prevent loss of Valve spring compressor: 070-GE-001-I100
tension, do not
compress the
valve spring
more than
necessary.
VALVE SPRING
COMPRESSOR
Support the Tap the stems gently with two plastic hammer to firmly
cylinder head seat the cotters. COTTERS
above the work
bench surface
to prevent valve
damage.
CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION

Do not allow Install the dowel pins and new gasket.
dust and dirt
Route the cam chain through the cylinder head, and place
to enter the
the cylinder head onto the cylinder.
engine.
DOWEL PINS GASKET
If required
replace the old
intake manifold
O-ring with a
new one.
Install the stud bolts (4 nos.)in the cylinder head and tighten STUD BOLTS/NUTS
Dip the stud nuts & washer in the clean engine oil.
Install and tighten the nuts (4 nos.) on the stud bolts to the
specified torque.
Install & tighten the flange bolts (2 nos.) to the specified
torque. FLANGE
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft) BOLTS
7-19
STUD BOLT
NUT
After tightening the stud bolts and nuts to the specified
torque, it is mandatory to maintain distance between
top of the stud bolts and top of the nuts between the
7.4 mm – 12 mm
specified limits as shown in illustration.
Be careful not Rotate crankshaft counterclockwise, and align the “ ” mark
T
to jam the cam on the flywheel with the index notch on the left crankcase
INDEX NOTCH
chain and timing cover.
sprocket on the
Make sure the piston is at TDC (Top Dead Center) on the
crankshaft when
compression stroke.
rotating the
crankshaft.
“ ” MARK
T
Apply clean engine oil to the cam chain entire surface.
Install the cam sprocket onto the cam chain so that the CAM CHAIN
index lines of the cam sprocket are parallel with the cylinder
head surface.
Cover the cam chain opening with a hop towel to prevent

the cam sprocket bolts from falling into the crankcase.
“o” MARK
Align the bolt hole and place the cam sprocket on to the BOLTS
groove of camshaft.
Install and tighten the cam sprocket bolt to the specified
torque by holding the flywheel.
Apply clean engine oil to new O-ring & install on timing
hole cap.
Install and tighten the timing hole cap to specified torque. INDEX LINE
TORQUE : 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6.6 lbf·ft)
7-20
Install and tighten the intake manifold bolts (2 nos.) as per

the specified torque.
BOLTS
TORQUE : 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the following:
–– Cover cylinder head L-Side
–– Cylinder head cover
–– Exhaust pipe/muffler
–– Spark Plug
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER LIFTER CHOKE

REMOVAL CABLE
STAY
Remove the bolts (2 nos.) and choke cable stay.
BOLTS
Remove the tensioner lifter plug pan screw.
PAN SCREW
Remove the mounting bolts (2 nos.).

BOLTS
Remove the cam chain tensioner lifter and gasket. TENSIONER LIFTER
O-RING
GASKET
7-21
INSPECTION
Check the lifter operation: TENSIONER LIFTER
• The tensioner shaft should not go into the body when
it is pushed.
• When it is turned clockwise with a stopper tool
(page 7-6), the tensioner lifter shaft should be pulled
into the body. The shaft spring out of the body as soon
as the stopper tool is released.
STOPPER TOOL
INSTALLATION TENSIONER LIFTER

Turn the tensioner lifter shaft clockwise with the stopper
tool to retract the tensioner lifter, then insert the stopper
fully to hold the tensioner lifter in the fully retracted position.
Install a new gasket on the cam chain tensioner lifter.
TOOL:
Tensioner lifter stopper 070MG-0010100
GASKET
Install the cam chain tensioner lifter.

BOLTS
Install the two mounting bolts and tighten them. TENSIONER LIFTER
Remove the stopper tool from the tensioner lifter.
Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the
lifter.
O-RING
Install the tensioner lifter plug pan screw and tighten it to

the specified torque. PAN SCREW
7-22
MEMO
CYLINDER/PISTON
COMPONENT LOCATION
8-0
8. CYLINDER/PISTON
COMPONENT LOCATION 8-0 TROUBLESHOOTING8-1
SERVICE INFORMATION 8-1 CYLINDER/PISTON8-2
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• The cylinder and piston services can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
• Take care not to damage the cylinder wall and piston.
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces when removing the cylinder. Do not strike the cylinder too hard during removal.
• Camshaft and rocker arm lubricating oil is fed through an oil passage in the cylinder. Clean the oil passage before installing
cylinder.

I.D. 57.300 – 57.310 (2.2559 – 2.2563) 57.40 (2.260)
Out-of-round – 0.10 (0.004)
Cylinder
Taper
Warpage
–
–
0.10 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
8
Piston O.D. at 10 (0.4) from bottom 57.280 – 57.295 (2.2551 – 2.2557) 57.20 (2.252)
Piston pin hole I.D. 14.002 – 14.008 (0.5512 – 0.5514) 14.04 (0.553)
Piston pin O.D. 13.994 - 14.000 (0.5510 - 0.5511) 13.96 (0.550)
Piston, Piston-to-piston pin clearance 0.002 – 0.014 (0.0001 – 0.0006) 0.04 (0.002)
piston pin, Top 0.07 - 0.17 (0.002 - 0.0066) 0.40 (0.016)
piston ring Piston ring end gap Second 0.10 - 0.25 (0.004 - 0.010) 0.40 (0.016)
Oil (side rail) 0.10 – 0.35 (0.008 – 0.013) 0.85 (0.033)
Piston ring-to-ring Top 0.030 – 0.060 (0.0012 – 0.0024) 0.10 (0.004)
groove clearance Second 0.015 – 0.050 (0.0006 – 0.0020) 0.10 (0.004)
Cylinder-to-piston clearance 0.005 – 0.030 (0.0002 – 0.0012) 0.09 (0.004)
Connecting rod small end I.D. 14.010 – 14.028 (0.5516 – 0.5523) 14.06 (0.554)
Connecting rod-to-piston pin clearance 0.010 – 0.034 (0.0004 – 0.0013) 0.10 (0.004)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Compression too low, hard starting or poor performance TOOLS
at low speed
Slider base piston
• Leaking cylinder head gasket
070SRTKSP008
• Worn, stuck or broken piston rings
• Worn or damaged cylinder and piston
Compression too high, overheating or knocking
• Excessive carbon built-up on top of piston or combustion
chamber
Excessive smoke
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings
• Improper installation of piston rings
• cored or scratched piston or cylinder wall
Abnormal noise (piston)
• Worn piston pin or piston pin hole
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings
• Worn connecting rod small end
8-1
CYLINDER/PISTON
CYLINDER/PISTON DOWEL PINS GASKET

CYLINDER REMOVAL
The cylinder Remove the cylinder head (page 7-10).
can be serviced
Remove the gasket
with the engine
installed in the Remove the cam chain guide.
frame
CAM CHAIN GUIDE
Do not strike Lift the cylinder, and remove it, being careful not to damage
the cylinder the piston.
too hard and
Clean the top of the cylinder thoroughly.
do not damage
the mating
surface with a
screwdriver.
CYLINDER
Remove the dowel pins and gasket.
GASKET
DOWEL PIN
CYLINDER INSPECTION
Inspect the cylinder wall for scratches and wear.
BORE GAUGE
Measure and record the cylinder I.D. with bore gauge at
three levels in both the X and Y axes. Take the maximum
reading to determine the cylinder wear.
CYLINDER
Calculate the cylinder-to-piston clearance.
8-2
CYLINDER/PISTON
Calculate the cylinder for taper and out of round at three

levels in an X and Y axis. Take the maximum reading to
determine the out of round.
SERVICE LIMITS: TOP
Taper: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Out of round: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
The cylinder must be re-bored and an oversize piston fitted MIDDLE
if the service limit is exceeded.
The following oversize pistons rings are available:
0.25 mm (0.010 in)
BOTTOM
0.50 mm (0.019 in)
0.75 mm (0.029 in)
1.00 mm (0.039 in)
The cylinder must be re-bored so that the clearance

for an oversize piston rings is:
0.005 – 0.030 mm (0.0002 – 0.0012 in).
Check the cylinder for warpage with a straight edge and
feeler gauge across the studs and bolt holes as shown.
FEELER GAUGE
Place a clean PISTON REMOVAL

shop towel in
the crankcase Remove the piston pin clips using the pliers.
opening to TOOL:
prevent the
possibility of the Slider base piston 070SRTKSP008
piston pin clip
falling into the
crankcase.
PISTON PIN CLIP
Remove the piston pin and remove the piston.

Inspect the piston rings for movement by pressing the
rings. The rings should be able to move in its groove MATING SURFACE
without catching.
8-3
CYLINDER/PISTON
Spread each piston ring and remove it by lifting it up at a

point just opposite and gap.
• Do not damage the piston ring by spreading the ends
too far.
• Be careful not to damage the piston when the piston
ring removal.
PISTON RING
Never use a Clean carbon deposits from the piston ring grooves with a
wire brush, it ring that will be discarded. PISTON
will scratch the
grooves.
PISTON RING
PISTON INSPECTION
MICRO METER
Inspect the piston for cracks or other damage.
Inspect the ring grooves for excessive wear and carbon
buildup.
10 mm (0.4 in)
Measure the piston O.D. at a point 10 mm (0.4 in) from the
bottom and 90° to the piston pin hole.
Calculate the cylinder-to-piston clearance.
Take the maximum reading to determine the clearance
(Cylinder I.D.:page 8-2).
Measure the each piston pin hole I.D. in an X and Y axis.

Take the maximum reading to determine I.D.
PISTON PIN GROOVE
8-4
CYLINDER/PISTON
Measure the piston pin O.D. at three points.

Calculate the piston-to-piston pin clearance.
PISTON PIN
Measure the connecting rod small end I.D.

CONNECTING ROD
Calculate the connecting rod small end-to-piston pin
clearance.
Using a piston, push the ring securely into the cylinder and
FEELER GAUGE CYLINDER
measure the end gap using a feeler gauge.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Top: 0.40 mm (0.016 in) PISTON RING
Second: 0.40 mm (0.016 in)
Oil: 0.85 mm (0.033 in)
Always replace Inspect the piston rings, and replace them if they are worn.
the piston rings PISTON RING
Reinstall the piston rings into the piston grooves.
as a set.
Push in the ring until the outer surface of the piston ring
is nearly flush with the piston and measure the clearance
using a feeler gauge.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Top: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Second: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
8-5
CYLINDER/PISTON
PISTON INSTALLATION
Clean the piston heads, ring lands and skirts.
Carefully install the piston rings onto the piston with their
markings facing up:
• Do not damage the piston ring by spreading the ends
too far.
• Be careful not to damage the piston when the piston
ring installation.
• Do not confuse the top and second rings.
• After installing the rings they should rotate freely, without
sticking.
• Space the ring end gaps 120 degrees apart.
TOP RING (“TOP 1” MARK)
SECOND RING (‘’TOP 2” MARK)

TO
P
1200 1
1200 1200
TOP 2
TOP RING
SECOND RING
A SIDE RAILS
SPACER
A A: 20 mm (0.8 in) OR MORE
TOP RING
SECOND RING
SIDE RAILS
8-6
CYLINDER/PISTON
When cleaning Clean any gasket material from the cylinder mating surface
the cylinder of the crankcase.
mating surface, MATING SURFACE
Place a shop towel over the crankcase opening to prevent
place a shop
piston pin clips from falling into the crankcase.
towel over the
cylinder opening
to prevent dust
or dirt enter the
engine.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the piston pin outer

“IN MARK”
surface.
Install the piston with its “IN” mark facing the intake side.
Install the piston pin.
TOOL:
Slider base piston 070SRTKSP008
PISTON
PISTON PIN
Install the new piston pin clips:

• Always use new piston pin clips. Reinstalling used
piston pin clips may lead to serious engine damage.
• Set the piston pin clip in the groove properly.
• Do not align the clip’s end gap with the piston cutout.
PISTON PIN CLIP
CYLINDER INSTALLATION
Do not reuse the Install the dowel pins and new gasket.
gasket, replace GASKET
with a new one.
DOWEL PIN
8-7
CYLINDER/PISTON
Be careful not Apply clean engine oil to the cylinder inner surface, piston
to damage the outer surface and piston rings.
piston rings and
Route the cam chain through the cylinder, and install the
cylinder wall.
cylinder over the piston while compressing the piston rings
with your fingers.
CYLINDER
TOOL:
Slider base piston 070SRTKSP008
SLIDER BASE PISTON/

PISTON PISTON RINGS
Insert the cam chain guide into the cylinder and crankcase
groove. CAM CHAIN GUIDE
Install the cylinder head (page 7-19).
GROOVE
8-8
MEMO
COMPONENT LOCATION
12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9 Ibf.ft)
83 N.m (8.3 kgf.m, 61 Ibf.ft)
83 N.m (8.3 kgf.m, 61 Ibf.ft)
64 N.m (6.4 kgf.m, 47 Ibf.ft)

12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9.0 Ibf.ft)
9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 6.6 Ibf.ft)
9-0
9. CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
COMPONENT LOCATION 9-0 CLUTCH9-6
SERVICE INFORMATION 9-1 GEAR SHIFT LINKAGE 9-12
TROUBLESHOOTING9-2 PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR 9-14
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER 9-3 BALANCER DRIVE GEAR 9-15
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the clutch, gearshift linkage, kick starter. All services can be done with the engine installed in
the frame.
• Engine oil viscosity and level have an effect on clutch disengagement. When the clutch does not disengage or motorcycle
creeps with clutch disengaged, inspect the engine oil level before servicing the clutch system.

Clutch lever free play 10 – 20 (0.4 – 0.8) –
Spring free length 38.4(1.59) 37.5 (1.47)
Clutch Disc thickness 2.92 – 3.08 (0.115 – 0.121)
–
2.6 (0.10)
0.20 (0.008)
9
Plate warpage
Clutch outer I.D. 23.000 – 23.021 (0.9055 – 0.9063) 23.08 (0.909)
O.D. 22.959 – 22.980 (0.9039 – 0.9047) 22.93 (0.903)
Clutch outer guide
I.D. 16.991 – 17.009 (0.6689 – 0.6696) 17.04 (0.671)
Mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide 16.966 – 16.984 (0.6680 – 0.6687) 16.95 (0.667)
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
ITEM PART NO. QTY DIA. (mm) N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft) REMARKS PAGE NO.
Clutch center lock nut 90202 – KRM – 840 1 14 83 (8.3, 61) NOTE 1 Page 9–11
Clutch lifter plate bolt 90008 – KRM – 840 3 6 12 (1.2, 9) Page 9–11
Oil filter rotor lock nut 90202 – KRM – 840 1 14 83 (8.3, 61) NOTE 1 Page 9–12
Shift drum stopper arm bolt 90022 – KRM – 840 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) NOTE 2 Page 9–13
Gearshift cam bolt 90003 – KVS – 900 1 6 12 (1.2, 9) NOTE 2 Page 9–14
9-1
TOOLS
Gear holder Holder gear drum stopper arm Clutch center holder
0706 - KRB - T7900 070SRTKSP010 070SRTKSP011
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faulty clutch operation can usually be corrected by adjusting the free play.
Clutch lever difficult to pull in
• Damaged, kinked or dirty clutch cable
• Improperly routed clutch cable
• Damaged clutch lifter mechanism
• Faulty clutch lifter plate bearing
Clutch will not disengage or motorcycle creeps with clutch disengaged
• Excessive clutch lever free play
• Clutch plate warped
• Oil level too high, improper oil viscosity, or additive used
• Check for oil additive
Clutch slips
• Clutch lifter sticking
• Worn clutch discs
• Weak clutch springs
• No clutch lever free play
• Check for oil additive
Hard to shift
• Misadjusted clutch cable
• Damaged or bent shift fork
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity
• Incorrect gearshift spindle assembly
• Damaged shift drum guide grooves
Transmission jumps out of gear
• Worn shift drum stopper arm
• Worn or broken gearshift spindle return spring
• Worn gear dogs or dog holes
Gearshift pedal will not return
• Weak or broken gearshift spindle return spring
• Bent gearshift spindle
9-2
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER LIFTER ARM

REMOVAL CLUTCH CABLE
The right Drain the engine oil (page 3-11).
crankcase cover
can be serviced Remove the following:
with the engine –– Kick starter pedal (page 6-2)
installed in the Loosen the lock nut and adjusting nut, then disconnect the
frame. clutch cable from the clutch lifter arm.
Remove the kick start stopper by removing bolts/nuts

HOLDER COVER
(2 nos.).
Loosen the right crankcase cover bolts (12 nos.) in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the right
crankcase cover bolts, clutch cable holder and right
crankcase cover. KICK
START
STOPPER
BOLTS BOLTS
Remove the dowel pins (2 nos.) and gasket.

GASKET
DOWEL PINS
DISASSEMBLY
LIFTER PIECE
Remove the clutch lifter piece.
RETURN SPRING
9-3
Rotate the lifter arm in anti clockwise direction then pull

out the clutch lifter arm from the right crankcase cover, and
remove the return spring.
CLUTCH LIFTER ARM
Remove the kick starter spindle dust seal.

DUST SEAL
Remove the clutch lifter arm and dust seal.
Check the clutch lifter arm for wear or damage.
Check the return spring for fatigue or damage.
Replace them if necessary.
CLUTCH LIFTER ARM
ASSEMBLY DUST SEAL

Apply grease to a new kickstarter spindle dust seal lip and
install it into the right crankcase cover.
Apply grease to a new clutch lifter arm dust seal lip and
install it into the right crankcase cover.
Apply clean engine oil to the clutch lifter arm sliding surface,
and install it into the right crankcase cover.
CLUTCH LIFTER ARM
Install the return spring onto the lifter arm groove and
and rotating the lifter arm in clockwise direction. RETURN SPRING
Hook the return spring ends as shown.
LIFTER ARM
GROOVE
9-4
Install the clutch lifter piece into the clutch lifter arm groove
by aligning the groove with the lifter piece hole. LIFTER PIECE
RETURN SPRING
INSTALLATION
Be careful not Clean off any gasket material from the mating surfaces of GASKET
to damage the the right crankcase and cover.
mating surfaces. Install the dowel pins and new gasket.
DOWEL PINS
Install the right crankcase cover, clutch cable holder and

right crankcase cover bolts. HOLDER COVER
Tighten the right crankcase cover bolts in a crisscross

pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6.6 lbf·ft) KICK
Install the kick start stopper and tighten the bolts/nuts START
(2 nos.). STOPPER
BOLTS BOLTS
Connect the clutch cable to the clutch lifter arm.

LIFTER ARM
Adjust the clutch lever free play (page 3-22).
CLUTCH CABLE
–– Kick starter pedal (page 6-6)
Fill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil
(page 3-10).
9-5
CLUTCH
LOCK NUT WRENCH GEAR HOLDER
REMOVAL
–– Right crankcase cover (page 9-3)
–– Oil filter rotor cover (page 3-12)
Install the gear holder between the primary drive and driven
gears as shown, and loosen the oil filter rotor lock nut using
lock nut wrench.
TOOLS:
Gear holder 07006-KRBT900 LOCK NUT
Remove the lock nut, lock washer and oil filter rotor.
OIL FILTER ROTOR
LOCK NUT WASHER
Loosen the clutch lifter plate bolts (3 nos.) in a crisscross

pattern in several steps. Separate. LIFTER PLATE SPRINGS
Remove the bolts, clutch lifter plate and clutch springs.
BOLTS
Attach the clutch center holder to the pressure plate using

four clutch lifter plate bolts to hold the clutch center, then CLUTCH CENTER HOLDER
loosen the clutch center lock nut using the special tool.
TOOL:
Clutch center holder 070SRTKSP011
LOCK NUT
9-6
Remove the special tools, lock nut and lock washer.

WASHER
LOCK NUT
Remove the following: PRESSURE PLATE

–– Clutch center
–– Clutch disc A DISCS B
–– Clutch plates and discs B CLUTCH
–– Pressure plate CENTER
DISC A
PLATES
DISC A

–– Washer CLUTCH OUTER
–– Clutch outer
WASHER
Remove the clutch outer guide.

CLUTCH OUTER GUIDE
9-7
INSPECTION
LIFTER PLATE BEARING
CLUTCH LIFTER BEARING
Turn the inner race of the clutch lifter bearing with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the
clutch lifter plate.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely in the
clutch lifter plate.
Replace the CLUTCH SPRING

clutch springs
Check the clutch spring for fatigue or damage.
as a set.
Measure the clutch spring free length.
CLUTCH CENTER
CLUTCH OUTER
Check the grooves of the clutch center for damage or wear
caused by the clutch plates.
GROOVE
FRICTION DISC
Check the friction discs for signs of scoring or discolouration.
DISC A DISC B
A>B
9-8
Replace the Measure the friction disc thickness of each clutch disc.
clutch discs and
SERVICE LIMIT: CLUTCH DISC
plates as a set.
Disc A, B: 2.6 mm (0.10 in)
CLUTCH PLATE
CLUTCH PLATE
Check the plate for discolouration.
Check the clutch plate for warpage on a surface plate
using a feeler gauge.
Warped clutch plates prevent the clutch from disengaging
properly.
CLUTCH OUTER/OUTER GUIDE

Check the slots in the clutch outer for nicks, indentations
or abnormal wear made by the clutch discs. CLUTCH OUTER
Check the primary driven gear teeth for wear or damage.
Measure the clutch outer I.D.
Check the clutch outer guide for damage or abnormal wear.
Measure the clutch outer guide I.D. and O.D.
SERVICE LIMITS:
I.D.: 17.04 mm (0.671 in)
O.D.: 22.93 mm (0.903 in)
MAINSHAFT
MAIN SHAFT
Measure the mainshaft O.D. at the clutch outer guide.
SERVICE LIMIT: 16.95 mm (0.667 in).
9-9
INSTALLATION
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the entire surface of the CLUTCH OUTER GUIDE
clutch outer guide, and install it onto the mainshaft .
Apply clean engine oil to the gear primary drive.
Install the oil pump driven gear.
GEAR PRIMARY DRIVE
Install the clutch outer and washer.

CLUTCH OUTER
WASHER
Coat the clutch discs with clean engine oil.

Assemble clutch disc A, disks B, clutch plates and pressure
plate onto clutch center by aligning “O” mark of clutch center
and pressure plate.
PRESSURE PLATE
DISC A
DISCS B
DISC A
CLUTCH
CENTER
PLATES
Align
9-10
Install the tabs Install the clutch center assembly into the clutch outer.
OUTER CLUTCH
of clutch disc A SHALLOW SLOT
(out side) to the
shallow
slots of the
clutch outer.
DISC A (OUTSIDE)
CLUTCH CENTER ASSEMBLY
Install the lock washer.

WASHER
Apply clean engine oil to the threads and seating surface
of the clutch center lock nut, and install it.
LOCK NUT
Attach the clutch center holder to the pressure plate using

clutch lifter plate bolts to hold the clutch center, then tighten CLUTCH CENTER HOLDER
the clutch center lock nut to the specified torque using
special tool.
TOOL:
Clutch center holder 070SRTKSP011
LOCK NUT
Install the clutch springs, clutch lifter plate and clutch lifter
plate bolts. LIFTER PLATE SPRINGS
Tighten the clutch lifter plate bolts to the specified torque
in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
BOLTS
9-11
Clean the inside of the oil filter rotor.

OIL FILTER ROTOR
Install the oil filter rotor and washer onto the crankshaft.
Apply clean engine oil to the threads and seating surface of
the lock nut and install it with the chamfered side facing in.
LOCK NUT WASHER
Install the gear holder between the primary drive and driven
gears as shown, and tighten the oil filter rotor lock nut to LOCK NUT WRENCH
the specified torque using the special tools.
TOOLS:
Gear holder 07006-KRBT900
TORQUE:83 N·m (8.3 kgf·m, 61 lbf·ft)
–– Oil filter rotor cover (page 3-13)
–– Right crankcase cover (page 9-5)
GEAR HOLDER LOCK NUT
GEARSHIFT LINKAGE GEARSHIFT SPINDLE
REMOVAL
–– Clutch assembly (page 9-6)
Pull out the gearshift spindle from the crankcase.
Remove the thrust washer.
THRUST WASHER
Remove the gearshift cam bolt by using special tool.

TOOL: BOLT
Holder gear drum stopper arm 070SRTKSP010
Remove the gearshift cam.
GEARSHIFT CAM
HOLDER GEAR DRUM

STOPPER ARM
9-12

–– Dowel pins from the shift drum RETURN SPRING
–– Stopper arm bolt DOWEL PINS
–– Stopper arm
–– Washer
–– Return spring WASHER
STOPPER ARM BOLT
INSPECTION
Check the gearshift spindle for wear or bend.
Check the spindle plate for wear, damage or deformation.
RETURN SPRING
Check the return spring for fatigue or damage.
GEARSHIFT SPINDLE
PLATE
INSTALLATION
RETURN SPRING
Apply locking agent to the stopper arm bolt threads.
Install the return spring, washer, stopper arm and bolt, and
tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft) WASHER
HOOK
Hook the return spring to the stopper arm groove.
STOPPER ARM BOLT
Install the dowel pins into the shift drum hole.

STOPPER ARM
Hold the stopper arm using a special tool and install the
gearshift cam, while aligning the pins hole with the dowel Align
pins.
TOOL:
Holder gear drum stopper arm: 070SRTKSP010
GEARSHIFT CAM
9-13
Apply a locking agent to the gearshift cam bolt threads.

Install and tighten the gearshift cam bolt to the specified BOLT
torque.
GEARSHIFT DRUM STOPPER
Apply clean engine oil to the gearshift spindle journal

rotating area. GEARSHIFT SPINDLE
Install the thrust washer to the gearshift spindle, and insert

the spindle into the crankcase.
WASHER
Install the gearshift spindle by aligning the return spring

Align
ends with the stopper pin.
–– Clutch assembly (page 9-10)
GEARSHIFT SPINDLE
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR

REMOVAL
Remove the clutch assembly (page 9-6).
Remove the primary drive gear.
9-14
INSTALLATION
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR
Apply clean engine oil to the primary drive gear.
Install the primary drive gear, while aligning the groove
with the woodruff key.
Install the clutch assembly (page 9-10).
Align
BALANCER DRIVE GEAR BALANSER DRIVE GEAR

REMOVAL
Remove the primary drive gear (page 9-14).
Remove the balancer drive gear.
INSTALLATION
BALANSER DRIVE GEAR
Apply clean engine oil to the balancer drive gear.
Install the balancer drive gear, while aligning the groove
with the woodruff key.
Install the primary drive gear (page 9-15).
Install the clutch assembly (page 9-10).
Align
9-15
ALTERNATOR
COMPONENT LOCATION
74 N.m (7.5 kgf.m, 55 Ibf.ft)
10-0
10. ALTERNATOR
COMPONENT LOCATION 10-0 STARTER CLUTCH 10-6
SERVICE INFORMATION 10-1 STARTER MOTOR 10-8
LEFT CRANKCASE COVER 10-2 STARTER / IGNITION PULSE
GENERATOR10-16
FLYWHEEL10-4
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers the removal and installation of the flywheel and alternator stator. These services can be done with the
engine installed in the frame.
• Refer to the alternator stator inspection (page 15-8).

Starter driven gear boss O.D. 45.660 – 45.673 (1.7976 – 1.7981) 45.60 (1.795)
Starter motor brush length 10.00 – 10.05 (0.394 – 0.396) 6.5 (0.26)
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE VALUE
ITEM PART NO. QTY
SIZE & TYPE N.m (kgf.m)
REMARKS PAGE NO. 10
Flywheel lock nut 90201 – KRM – 840 1 14 74 (7.4, 55) NOTE 1 Page 10–5
Starter clutch bolt 90085 – KSP – 901 6 6 16 (1.6, 12) NOTE 2 Page 10–8
Ignition pulse generator 96001 – 06016 – 00 2 6 10 (1.0, 7) NOTE 2 Page 10–17
mounting bolt
Wire guide bolt 96001 – 06016 – 00 1 6 10 (1.0, 7) NOTE 2 Page 10–17
TOOLS
Flywheel holder Flywheel puller
070SRTKSP015 070SRTKSP014
10-1
ALTERNATOR
LEFT CRANKCASE COVER IGNITION PULSE ALTERNATOR 2P

GENERATOR CONNECTOR
REMOVAL
CONNECTOR
Disconnect the alternator 2P (White) connector and ignition
pulse generator connector.
Remove the neutral switch wire from the left crankcase

grooves.
Remove the choke cable stay bolts (2 nos) and choke
cable stay.
CHOKE CABLE
STAY/BOLTS
NEUTRAL
SWITCH WIRE
The left Remove the left crankcase rear cover (page 6-3).
crankcase cover
Loosen the left crankcase cover bolts in a crisscross pattern
is magnetically
in several steps.
attached to
the flywheel, Remove the left crankcase cover bolts and cover.
be careful to
remove.
BOLTS
LEFT CRANKCASE COVER
Remove the dowel pins (2 nos.) and gasket.

GASKET
DOWEL
PINS
10-2
ALTERNATOR
INSTALLATION GASKET
Install the new gasket and dowel pins.
DOWEL
PINS
Install the left crankcase cover and tighten the bolt in a

crisscross pattern in several steps.
BOLTS
LEFT CRANKCASE COVER
Tighten the choke cable stay bolts (2 nos.) to the specified

torque.
TORQUE: 9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 6.6 Ibf.ft)
Route the neutral switch wire to the left crankcase grooves.
Install the left crankcase rear cover (page 6-5).
CHOKE CABLE
STAY/BOLTS
NEUTRAL
SWITCH WIRE
Connect the alternator 2P connector and ignition pulse

generator wire connector. IGNITION PULSE ALTERNATOR 2P
GENERATOR CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
10-3
ALTERNATOR
FLYWHEEL FLYWHEEL
HOLDER
REMOVAL
Remove the left crankcase cover (page 10-2).
Hold the flywheel with the flywheel holder and remove the
flywheel lock nut and washer.
TOOL:
Flywheel holder 070SRTKSP015
NUT/ WASHER
Remove the flywheel using the flywheel puller.

FLYWHEEL
TOOL: PULLER
Flywheel puller 070SRTKSP014
FLYWHEEL
Remove the collar, shaft and starter idle gear.

SHAFT COLLAR
STARTER IDLE
GEAR
When remove Remove the woodruff key and needle bearing.

the woodruff key NEEDLE BEARING
WOODRUFF KEY
be careful not
to damage the
key groove and
crankshaft.
10-4
ALTERNATOR
INSTALLATION
When install the Apply clean engine oil on the crankshaft. WOODRUFF KEY NEEDLE BEARING
woodruff key,
be careful not Install the needle bearing and woodruff key.
to damage the
key groove and
crankshaft.
Install the flywheel with the oneway clutch assy., while

aligning the woodruff key on the crankshaft.
Align
ONE WAY CLUTCH ASSY.
Apply clean engine oil to the flywheel lock nut threads and FLYWHEEL
seating surface. HOLDER
Install the washer and lock nut.
Hold the flywheel with the flywheel holder, tighten the lock
nut to the specified torque.
TOOL:
TORQUE: 74 N.m (7.4 kgf.m, 55 Ibf.ft)
NUT/
WASHER
Apply clean engine oil to the starter idle gear and shaft.
COLLAR
Install the starter idle gear, shaft and collar.
SHAFT
Install the left crankcase cover (page 10-3).
STARTER IDLE
GEAR
10-5
ALTERNATOR
STARTER CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the flywheel (page 10-4).
Remove the starter driven gear from the flywheel while
turning the driven gear counterclockwise.
STARTER
DRIVEN GEAR
Remove the starter clutch bolts while holding the flywheel

with a flywheel holder.
Tool:
FLYWHEEL
HOLDER
BOLTS
Remove the starter clutch assembly from the flywheel.

Remove the stater clutch cover. CLUTCH COVER
STARTER CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY
Do not bend or Remove the following:

tap the plate SPRING
–– Rollers ROLLER
when removing
–– Spring
the spring
guides.
10-6
ALTERNATOR
Check the spring for bend or damage.

Check the roller for wear or damage.
SPRING
ROLLAR
Check the roller contacting surface of the starter driven

gear for abnormal wear or damage.
Measure the starter driven gear boss O.D.
STARTER DRIVEN GEAR
DRIVEN GEAR
ONE WAY CLUTCH
SPRING
ROLLER
NEEDLE BEARING FLYWHEEL
16 N.m (1.6 kgf.m, 12 lbf.ft)
CLUTCH COVER
10-7
ALTERNATOR
Install the clutch cover and starter clutch assembly to the

flywheel, aligning the bolt hole of cover, starter clutch and
flywheel. CLUTCH COVER
STARTER CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY
Hold the flywheel using the flywheel holder.

TOOL:
Clean and apply a locking agent to the stater clutch bolts
threads.
Install and tighten the starter clutch bolts to the specified
torque.
FLYWHEEL
HOLDER
BOLTS
Apply clean engine oil to the starter driven gear teeth.

Install the starter driven gear to the flywheel while turning
the driven gear counterclockwise.
Make sure that the starter driven gear turns counter
clockwise smoothly and does not turn clockwise.
Install the flywheel (page 10-5).
STARTER
DRIVEN GEAR
STARTER MOTOR STARTER MOTOR

CABLE RUBBER CAP
REMOVAL
Slide the rubber cap off the starter motor terminal, and GROUND TERMINAL NUT
remove the terminal nut and starter motor cable. CABLE
Remove the two mounting bolts, ground cable and starter

motor from the crankcase.
BOLTS
10-8
ALTERNATOR
Remove the O-ring from the starter motor.
O-RING
DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION
Remove the starter motor case bolts and O-rings.
BOLTS

–– Front cover assembly SEAL RING
–– Seal ring
INSULATED
–– Lock washer WASHER
–– Insulated washer
–– Shims
SHIMS
LOCK WASHER
FRONT COVER
Record the Remove the following:

location and –– Rear cover assembly
number of SEAL RING SHIMS
–– Seal ring
shims. The
number of the –– Shims
shims are –– Armature
different
individually.
ARMATURE REAR COVER

ASSEMBLY
10-9
ALTERNATOR
Check the dust seal and needle bearing in the front cover
for deterioration, wear or damage.
DUST SEAL
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for continuity between the cable terminal and the

insulated brush.
There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the cable terminal and rear

cover.
There should be no continuity.

–– Springs SPRINGS
–– Screw/washers
–– Brush wire BRUSH
HOLDER
–– Brush holder
BRUSH
WIRE
SCREWS/
WASHER
10-10
ALTERNATOR
Remove the insulator plates.
INSULATOR

–– Nut
INSULATOR NUTS
–– Washer
–– Insulators
–– O-ring
–– Insulator plate BUSHING
INSULATOR
–– Brush terminal
PLATE
O-RING
BRUSH
TERMINAL
Check the bushing in the rear cover for wear or damage.
BUSHING
Measure the brush length.

10-11
ALTERNATOR
Inspect the brush spring for excessive wear, fatigue or

damage, replace if necessary.
BRUSH SPRING
Do not use Inspects the commutator bars of the armature for

COMMUTATOR BARS
emery or sand discolouration.
paper on the
commutator
ARMATURE
Check for continuity between pair of commutator bars.

Check for continuity between each commutator bar and

the armature shaft.
There should be no continuity.
10-12
ALTERNATOR
SEAL RING ARMATURE

INSULATED WASHER
FRONT COVER LOCK

WASHER
O-RINGS SHIMS
NUTS
SHIMS
WASHER
INSULATOR
O-RING
INSULATOR REAR
PLATES COVER
MOTOR CASE BRUSH TERMINAL

SEAL RING SPRING

–– Insulator plate
–– Brush terminal INSULATOR NUTS
–– New O-ring
–– Insulators
–– Washer BUSHING
INSULATOR
–– Nut
PLATE
O-RING
BRUSH
TERMINAL
The insulators Tighten the nut.

plate will be
damaged easily.
NUT
Be careful not to
over tighten the
nut.
10-13
ALTERNATOR
Install the insulator plates.
INSULATOR
Install the brush holder, washer and tighten the screws

with brush wire. SPRINGS
Install the springs into the brush holder.
BRUSH
HOLDER
BRUSH
WIRE
SCREWS/
WASHER
Install the shims onto the armature shaft.
SHIMS
Be careful not Install the shims properly as noted during removal.

to damage the
Apply a thin coat of grease to the armature shaft end.
brush and
armature. Install the brushes into the brush holder.
Spread the brushes.
Install the armature into the rear cover assembly.
Install a new seal ring to the motor case. ARMATURE
BRUSHES
10-14
ALTERNATOR
The coil may be damaged if the magnet pulls the armature

against the case. SPRING
Align the rear Install the armature/rear cover into the motor case while
cover tab with holding the armature tightly to keep the magnet of the case
the motor case from pulling the armature against it.
groove.
SEAL RING
Install the shims Install the shims and insulated washer onto the armature
properly as shaft. SEAL RING
noted during
Install the new seal ring onto the motor case.
removal.
Apply grease to the dust seal lip and needle bearing in SHIMS
the front cover.
Install the lock washer onto the front cover.
Install the front cover being careful not to damage the
dust seal lip.
INSULATED WASHER
LOCK WASHER FRONT COVER
Align the index lines on the front cover and motor case.
Install the new O-rings onto the motor case bolts.
Install the motor case bolts and tighten them.
ALIGN
BOLTS / O-RINGS
INSTALLATION
Coat a new O-ring with clean engine oil and install it into
the starter motor groove.
O-RING
10-15
ALTERNATOR
While installing Install the starter motor into the left crankcase cover and STARTER MOTOR
the starter motor onto the crankcase . CABLE RUBBER CAP
cable, route the
Install the mounting bolts with the ground cable, and tighten
wire harness
the bolts. GROUND TERMINAL NUT
properly.
CABLE
Install the stater motor cable and terminal nut onto the
motor terminal and tighten the nut.
Install the rubber cap over the motor terminal properly.
BOLTS
STATOR/IGNITION PULSE FLANGE BOLTS
GENERATOR
REMOVAL
Remove the left crankcase cover (page 10-2).
Remove the flange bolts (3 nos.), wire guide and ignition
pulse generator.
Remove the grommet.
IGNITION
PULSE
GROMMET GUIDE GENERATOR
Remove the three flange bolts and stator from the left
crankcase cover.
STATOR
BOLTS
INSTALLATION
Install the stator.
Install the three bolts and tighten it.
STATOR
BOLTS
10-16
ALTERNATOR
Apply liquid sealant to the wire grommet seating surface,

FLANGE BOLTS
and install the wire grommet into the groove.
Install the wire guide and ignition pulse generator.
Apply a locking agent to the three bolt threads.
Install the bolts and tighten it to the specified torque.
IGNITION
GROMMET
PULSE
GUIDE GENERATOR
10-17
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER
COMPONENT LOCATION
64 N.m (6.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibf.ft)
12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9.0 Ibf.ft)
10 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7 Ibf.ft)
55 N.m (5.5 kgf.m, 44 Ibf.ft)
11-0
11. CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER
COMPONENT LOCATION 11-0 TRANSMISSION11-6
SERVICE INFORMATION 11-1 CRANKSHAFT11-8
TROUBLESHOOTING11-2 CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY 11-17
CRANKCASE SEPARATION 11-4 KICKSTARTER11-21
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• The following components must be removed before separating the crankcase:
–– Engine (page 6-2)
–– Cylinder head (page 7-10)
–– Cylinder/piston (page 8-2)
–– Clutch (page 9-6)
–– Oil pump (page 4-2)
–– Gearshift linkage (page 9-12)
–– Flywheel (page 10-4)
–– Neutral switch (page 17-12)
–– Primary drive gear (page 9-14)
–– Remove vehicle speed sensor (page 17-7)
• Be careful not to damage the crankcase mating surfaces when servicing.
• Clean the oil passages before assembling the crankcase halves.

ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT 11
Runout – 0.03 (0.0007)
Crankshaft Connecting rod big end radial clearance 0 – 0.008 (0 – 0.0003) 0.05 (0.002)
Connecting rod big end side clearance 0.10 – 0.35 (0.003 – 0.014) 0.80 (0.032)
M4 20.000 – 20.018 (0.7874 – 0.7882) 20.05 (0.789)
M5 17.000 – 17.018 (0.6692 – 0.6699) 17.05 (0.671)
Gear I.D. C1 20.500 – 20.521 (0.8071 – 0.8079) 20.55 (0.809)
C2 23.020 – 23.041 (0.9063 – 0.9071) 23.07 (0.908)
C3 20.020 – 20.038 (0.7881 – 0.7888) 20.07 (0.790)
C1 20.459 – 20.480 (0.8055 – 0.8063) 20.41 (0.804)
Bushing O.D.
C2 22.984 – 23.005 (0.9049 – 0.9057) 22.95 (0.904)
Gear-to-bushing C1 0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024) 0.10 (0.004)
Transmission clearance C2 0.015 – 0.057 (0.0006 –0.0022) 0.10 (0.004)
C1 17.000 – 17.018 (0.6693 – 0.6699) 17.04 (0.671)
Bushing I.D.
C2 20.020 – 20.041 (0.7882 – 0.7890) 20.07 (0.790)
C1 16.966 – 16.984 (0.6680 – 0.6687) 16.93 (0.667)
Mainshaft / C2 19.978 – 19.989 (0.7865 – 0.7870) 19.94 (0.785)
countershaft
O.D. M4 19.968 – 19.980 (0.7861 – 0.7866) 19.94 (0.785)
M5 16.968 – 16.980 (0.6679 – 0.6686) 16.93 (0.666)
Bushing-to-shaft C1 0.016 – 0.052 (0.0006 – 0.0020) 0.10 (0.004)
clearance C2 0.031 – 0.063 (0.0012 – 0.0025) 0.20 (0.008)
Shift fork shaft O.D. 9.986 – 9.995 (0.3931 – 0.3935) 9.93 (0.391)
Shift fork,
Shift fork I.D. 10.000 – 10.018 (0.3937 – 0.3944) 10.05 (0.396)
shift fork shaft
Shift fork claw thickness 4.930 - 5.000 (0.194 - 0.197) 4.500 (0.177)
Kickstarter drive gear I.D 20.00- 20.21 (0.7873 - 0.7956) 16.06 (0.632)
Kickstarter spindle O.D. at Kickstarter drive gear 19.959 - 19.980 (0.7875 - 0.7866) 15.94 (0.628)
11-1
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Balancer Shaft Nut (Right crankcase) 90202 – KRM – 840 1 14 64 (6.5, 47) Page 11–19
Balancer Shaft Nut (Left crankcase) 94002 – 12200 – 0S 1 12 55 (5.5, 44) Page 11–20
Push plug bolt 96001 – 06016 – 00 1 6 10 (1.0, 7) Page 11–20
TROUBLESHOOTING
Excessive engine noise
• Worn, seized or chipped transmission gears
• Worn or damaged transmission bearings
• Worn or damaged connecting rod big end bearing
• Worn crankshaft bearing
Hard to shift
• Improper clutch operation
• Bent shift fork
• Damaged shift fork guide pin
Transmission jumps out of gear
• Worn gear dogs or slots
• Worn shift drum guide groove
• Worn shift fork guide pin
• Worn shift fork groove in gear
• Worn shift fork shaft
11-2
TOOLS
Remover shaft, 12 mm Remover weight Driver

070MCKPLI410 070MCKPLI300 070GD004I100
Remover shaft, 12 mm
070MCKPLI400
Pilot, 12 mm Pilot, 17 mm Pilot, 20 mm

070GD004I130 070GD004I150 070GD004I160
Oil seal remover Fork seal driver Socket wrench steering

070SRTKSP002 070SRTKSP001 070SRTKSP004
Assembly collar Remover head, 17 mm Gear Holder

070MFKPLI110 070MFKPLI520 07006–KRB–T7900
11-3
CRANKCASE SEPARATION
BALANCER GEAR REMOVAL
Refer to service information (page 11-1) for removal of
necessary parts before disassembling the crankcase.
Remove the cam chain tensioner set plate bolts (2 nos.)
and tensioner set plate.
Remove cam chain tensioner guide.
CAM CHAIN SET PLATE BOLT
Remove the cam chain.

BOLT
Remove the bolt and push plug plate.
PUSH PLUG
PLATE
Remove the push plug and spring. PUSH PLUG
SPRING
Hold the gear balancer drive and gear balancer driven GEAR BALANCER DRIVEN
using gear lock.
Remove the driven balancer gear and weight nut. NUT
TOOLS:
Remove the driven balancer gear & weight.
Remove woodruff keys from the balancer shaft from right
side.
GEAR LOCK
11-4
Remove the balancer weight nut from ACG (left) side.
BALANCER BOLT
BALANCER GEAR INSPECTION

Check the balancer gear for wear or damage.
BALANCER GEAR
Remove the left crankcase bolts in a criss cross pattern in

two or three step and remove them. BOLTS
Do not pry Place the crankcase assembly with the right side down.
DOWEL PINS
the crankcase
Carefully separate the left crankcase from the right
halves with a
crankcase by tapping them at several locations with a soft
screw driver.
hammer.
Remove the dowel pins (2 nos.).
11-5
TRANSMISSION
DISASSEMBLY
Separate the crankcase halves (page 11-4).
Carefully remove the balancer shaft.
BALANCER DRIVE SHAFT
Pull out the shift fork shafts.
SHIFT FORKS SHAFT
Remove the shift forks and shift drum. SHIFT FORKS SHAFT
SHIFT DRUM
Remove the mainshaft and countershaft together.

MAINSHAFT
Disassemble the mainshaft and countershaft.
COUNTERSHAFT
11-6
INSPECTION
GEARS
Check the gear dogs, dog holes and teeth for damage of
excessive wear.
Measure the I.D. of each gear.
SERVICE LIMIT:
M4: 20.05 mm (0.789 in)
M5: 17.05 mm (0.671 in)
C1: 20.55 mm (0.809 in)
C2: 23.07 mm (0.908 in)
C3: 20.07 mm (0.790 in)
BUSHING
Check the bushings for wear or damage.
Measure O.D. of each bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT:
C1: 20.41 mm (0.804 in)
C2 22.95 mm (0.904 in)
Calculate the gear-to-bushing clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT:
C1: 0.10 mm (0.004in)
C2: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Measure I.D of each bushing.
C1: 17.04 mm (0.6.71 in)
C2: 20.07 mm (0.790 in)
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
M5 M4
Check the spine grooves and sliding surfaces for abnormal
wear or damage.
Measure the O.D of the mainshaft and countershaft at gear
and bushing sliding areas.
SERVICE LIMIT:
Mainshaft (at M4 gear bushing):
19.94 mm (0.785 in)
(at M5 gear bushing):
16.93 mm (0.666 in)
C2 C3 C1
Countershaft (at C1 gear bushing):
16.93 mm (0.667 in)
(at C2 gear bushing):
19.94 mm (0.785 in)
Calculate the bushing-to-shaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT:
C1: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C2: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)
SHIFT DRUM
Inspect the shift drum end for scoring, scratches, or
evidence of sufficient lubrication. SHIFT DRUM
Check the shift drum grooves for abnormal wear or

damage.
11-7
SHIFT FORK
Check the shift forks for deformation or abnormal wear.
Measure each shift fork claw thickness.
SERVICE LIMITS: 4.500 mm (0.177 in)
Measure I.D. of each fork.
SHIFT FORK SHAFT

Check the shift fork shafts for damage and straightness.
Measure the shift fork shaft for O.D.
CRANKSHAFT
REMOVAL
Remove both crankcase (page 11-5).
Remove the transmission (page 11-6).
Remove the crankshaft from the right crankcase.
CRANKSHAFT
INSPECTION
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
Place the crankshaft on a stand or V-blocks.
Set the dial indicator on the shafts.
Rotate the crankshaft two revolutions and read the runout.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.03mm (0.0007 in)
47.5 MM (1.87 IN) 45 MM (1.69 IN)
11-8
BIG END SIDE CLEARANCE

Measure the side clearance of the connecting rod big end
with feeler gauge.
BIG END RADIAL CLEARANCE

Measure the radial clearance of the connecting rod big end.
If the timing TIMING SPROCKET

sprocket teeth
Check the timing sprocket teeth for wear or damage.
are worn or
damaged. Remove the timing sprocket if necessary.
Check the cam CRANK PIN
When installing the timing sprocket, while align the center
chain
of the timing sprocket teeth with the center of the crank pin.
tensioner and
cam sprocket
TIMING SPROCKET
CRANKSHAFT/BALANCER BEARING
INSPECTION
Turn the inner of each bearing with your finger. The
bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that bearing outer races fit tightly in the
crankcase.
Replace bearing if the inner race do not turn smoothly,
quietly or if they loosely fit in crankcase (page 11-10).
11-9
REMOVAL
BOLTS/SETTING/
Remove the setting plate bolts and mainshaft bearing STOPPER PLATES
setting plates from the right crankcase. MAINSHAFT
BEARING
Drive out the mainshaft & countershaft bearing from the
right crankcase.
with following tools.
TOOLS:
Remover shaft, 17mm 07936-3710330
Remover handle 07936-3710100
Remover weight 070MC-KPLI300 COUNTERSHAFT
BEARING
Remove the countershaft dust seal and gear shift spindle

dust seal from the left crankcase.
COUNTERSHAFT
DUST SEAL
GEARSHIFT SPINDLE
DUST SEAL
Drive out the countershaft bearing from the left crankcase.

Tools
Remover shaft, 17 mm 07936-3710330
Remover handle 07936-3710100
Remover weight 070MC-KPLI300 COUNTERSHAFT
BEARING
Drive out the mainshaft bearing from the left crankcase

with following tools.
Tools
Remover head, 12mm 070MC-KPLI410 MAINSHAFT
Remover shaft, 12mm 070MC-KPLI420 BEARING
Remover weight 070MC-KPLI300
11-10
OIL PASSAGES INSPECTION

Clean the oil passages of each crankcase using the
compressed air.
OIL PASSAGE
INSTALLATION
Lubricate the all bearing with engine oil.
ATTACHMENT
Drive new bearings into the left crankcase with following
tools: DRIVER
TOOLS:
RIGHT CRANKCASE
Mainshaft bearing:
PILOT
Driver 070GD-001I100
Attachment, 37x40 mm 070GD-002I150 BEARING
Pilot, 17 mm 070GD-004I150
Mainshaft bearing:
Attachment, 37x40 mm 070GD-002I150
Pilot, 17 mm 070GD-004I150
LEFT CRANKCASE
Mainshaft bearing:
Pilot, 12 mm 070GD-004I130
Countershaft bearing:
Pilot,20 mm 070GD-004I160
Apply grease to the new dust seal lips.

Install the countershaft and gearshift spindle dust seals
with following tools as shown. DRIVE TO CASE
END FACE
Tools: 0.5 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in)
Countershaft dust seal:
Attachment, 34 mm 07JAD-PL60100
Pilot,20 mm 070GD-004I160
Gearshift spindle dust seal:
GEAR SHIFT
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm: 07746-0010800 COUNTERSHAFT
SPINDLE DUST
Pilot,20 mm 07746-0041200 SEAL
DUST SEAL
11-11
Apply locking agent to the threads of the setting plate bolt.

Install the setting plates and bolts.
Install the setting plates and bolts. BOLTS/SETTING
STOPPER PLATES
Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N.m (1.2 kgf. m, 9 Ibf.ft)
BEARING REPLACEMENT OF
CRANKSHAFT
INSPECTION
Turn the inner race of bearing with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that bearing outer races fit tightly in the
crankcase.
Replace bearing if the inner race do not turn smoothly,
quietly or if they loosely fit in crankcase (page 11-10).
REMOVAL CRANKSHAFT
Drive out the crankshaft bearing from the right crankcase. BEARING
INSTALLATION
If the crankshaft bearing inner race is removed install it IN SIDE
as shown.
INNER RACE
11-12
Lubricate the all bearings with engine oil.

Drive new bearings into the right crankcase with following
tools.
DRIVER
TOOLS:
Crankshaft bearing: ATTACHMENT
Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07NAD-P200100
Pilot, 30 mm 07746-0040700
BEARING
INSTALLATION
Install the crankshaft into the right crankcase.
Install the transmission.
CRANKSHAFT
INSTALLATION
Clean all parts in solvent and dry them thoroughly.
CORRECT INCORRECT
Apply clean engine oil to each gear teeth.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the bushing sliding
surface to ensure initial lubrication.
Assemble all parts into their original positions.
• Check the gears for freedom of movement or rotation
on the shaft.
• Install the washers and snap rings with the chamfered
edge facing the thrust load side. Confirm the inner
side of snap rings and washer when you detect the SNAP RING
chamfered side.
• Do not reuse worn snap ring which could easily spin
in the groove.
• Check that the snap rings are seated in the shaft
grooves, and align their end gaps with the grooves of
the spline.
11-13
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT 13 T
M4 GEAR
: EACH GEAR TEETH (30 T)
SET RING
: BUSHING AND SPLINE WASHER (20 mm)
THRUST WASHER
(17 mm)
M5 GEAR
(24 T)
SPLINE WASHER
(20 mm)
M3 GEAR
(20 T)
CHAMFERED SIDE
M2 GEAR
SPECIAL WASHER (19 T)
(12 X 23 mm)
SHARP SIDE
11-14
COUNTERSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
C5 GEAR
(22 T)
THRUST
WASHER
(20 mm)
C2 GEAR C2 BUSH SPECIAL WASHER
(34 T) (20 mm) (17 mm)
COLLAR
(20 mm)
SET RING
SPLINE (20 mm)
WASHER
(20 mm)
C1 BUSHING
(20 mm)
C1 GEAR
(40 T)
C4 GEAR THRUST
(32 T) WASHER
(17 mm)
THRUST
CHAMFERED SIDE
WASHER C3 GEAR
(20 mm) (26 T)
SHARPED
EDGE SIDE
11-15
If the crankshaft removed, install the crankshaft first

(page 11-13).
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork grooves.
Apply clean engine oil to the transmission gear teeth.
Install the mainshaft and countershaft together into the

right crankcase. Be sure to install the three end washers
(mainshaft, left only countershaft, both ends.)
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
Each shift fork has an identification marks; “ R/L” (right and

left), “C” (center).
“C” MARK
Install the shift forks into the shifter gear grooves with the
marks facing up (left crankcase side).
“R/L” MARK
Apply clean engine oil to the guide grooves in the shift

drum and install it, while aligning the shift fork guide pins SHIFT FORKS SHAFT
with the guide grooves.
11-16
Apply clean engine oil to the shift fork shafts, and insert
them through the shift forks into the right crankcase. SHIFT FORK SHAFTS
Rotate the mainshaft by hand to see the gears rotate freely.

Assemble the crankcase.
Carefully install the balancer shaft aligning with its groove

with the groove given in the crankshaft. Align
CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY
Clean the oil passages of crankcase using the compressed PASSAGES
air.
Clean the left and right crankcase mating surface

thoroughly, being careful not to damage them and check
for damage.
Apply a light but through coating of sealant to all crankcase
mating surface except the oil passage area.
11-17
Install the dowel pins.
DOWEL PINS
Do not force Install the left crankcase over the right crankcase.
the crankcase
halves together,
if there is
excessive force
required, some
thing is wrong.
Remove the left
crankcase and
check for LEFT CRANKCASE
misaligned
parts.
RIGHT CRANKCASE
Install the crankcase bolts, and tighten the bolts in a

crisscross pattern in 2-3 steps. BOLTS
Install the tighten the right crankcase bolt.

BOLT
11-18
Install the balancer drive gear by aligning the keyway of

the gear and the crankshaft. BALANCER DRIVE GEAR
Align
Install the balancer driven gear by aligning the keyway of

the gear and the balancer shaft. BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR
Align
Align the punch marks on the balancer drive gear and

balancer driven gear for arranging the final timing for the Align
movement between the crankshaft and the balancer shaft.
Install the balancer driven weight ‘A’ on to the balancer

shaft by aligning its keyway. WEIGHT ‘A’
Install and tighten the balancer driven gear nut and washer
to the specified torque using the below mentioned special
tool.
TORQUE : 64 N.m (6.5 kgf.m, 47 lbf.ft)
TOOLS:
Align
11-19
Install the second weight ‘B’ by aligning the spline on the WEIGHT ‘B’
weight with the spline on the balancer shaft.
Tighten the washer and nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE : 55 N.m (5.5 kgf.m, 44 lbf.ft)
Align
When Apply molybdenum oil solution to the push plug.

PUSH PLUG
installing the
Install the push plug and spring.
push plug,
make sure
the crankshaft
bearing outer
touches the
taper part of SPRING
push plug.
Apply locking agent to the threads of the push plug bolt.

PUSH PLUG
Install the push plug plate and bolt. PLATE BOLT
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
Install the cam chain through the crankcase. CAM CHAIN

Install the cam chain to the sprocket.
Install the tensioner guide and tensioner guide plate.
Install and tighten the tensioner guide plate bolts (2 nos).
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
SET PLATE BOLT
11-20
KICKSTARTER SNAP RING

REMOVAL
Remove the right hand side crankcase (page 11-4).
Remove the snap ring and spindle retainer.
KICK STOPPER
Pullout the kickstarter assembly to unhook the return spring LOCK WASHER RETURN SPRING
from the crankcase.
DISASSEMBLY RETAINER SPRING

–– Lock washer SNAP SPRING
COLLAR
–– Collar Ratchet
–– Return spring
–– Snap ring SNAP
–– Ratchet RING
SNAP RING
RATCHET

–– Snap ring
SNAP RING
–– Washer
–– Drive gear
–– Spindle
DRIVE WASHER
GEAR
INSPECTION DRIVE
Check the following: GEAR
–– Starter ratchet and kickstarter drive gear for excessive
wear or damage
–– Spindle for vent or damage
Measure the kickstarter drive gear I.D. and spindle O.D.
at the kickstarter drive gear.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Drive gear I.D.: 16.06 mm (0.632 in)
SPINDLE
Spindle O.D.: 15.94 mm (0.628in)
11-21
RETAINER KICK SPINDLE

SNAP RING
KICKSTARTER SPINDLE
KICKSTARTER
WASHER DRIVE GEAR
SNAP RING
RATCHET STARTER DRIVE

SNAP RING
RETURN SPRING
COLLAR
WASHERS
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the kickstarter drive gear

inner surface, and install it.
SNAP RING
Install the washer and snap ring.
DRIVE GEAR WASHER
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the starter ratchet inner

surface, and install it by on the kickstarter spindle. RATCHET
SPINDLE
11-22
Hook the return spring to the hole of the kickstarter spindle, RETURN SPRING
and there install the collar by aligning its cut-out with the
spring.
Install the lock washer, and press it.

Install the lock washer in the groove of the kickstarter SPINDLE
spindle.
INSTALLATION
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the kickstarter drive
gear teeth.
Install the kickstarter assembly and insert the ratchet stop
into the right crankcase groove.
Hook the return spring to the crankcase right.
KICKSTARTER ASSEMBLY
Rotate the return kickstarter clockwise, counter clockwise

(if necessary) in order to ease the installation.
Install the kick stopper by aligning the punch marks on the
stopper and kickstarter shaft.
Install the snap ring.
Install the right crankcase (page 11-17).
Align
11-23
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
COMPONENT LOCATION
74 N.m (7.5 kgf.m, 55 Ibf.ft)
22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf.ft)
22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf.ft)
32 N.m (3.3 kgf.m, 24 Ibf.ft)
59 N.m (6.0 kgf.m, 44 Ibf.ft)
12-0
12. FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
COMPONENT LOCATION 12-0 FRONT WHEEL 12-9
SERVICE INFORMATION 12-1 FORK12-14
TROUBLESHOOTING12-3 STEERING STEM 12-22
HANDLEBAR12-4
Frequent inhalation of brake pad (shoe) dust, regardless of material composition could be hazardous to your health.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Riding on damaged rims impairs safe operation of the motorcycle.
• When servicing the front wheel, fork or steering stem, support the motorcycle using a center stand and hoist.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad (shoe) reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads (shoes), and clean a
contaminated disc with a high quality brake de-greasing agent.
• After the front wheel installation, check the brake operation by applying the brake lever.
• Refer to the brake system information (page 14-1).
• This motorcycle is equipped with the tubeless tyre.
• Refer to the tubeless tyre repair (page 13-1).

Minimum tire thread depth – 1.5 (0.06) 12
Driver only 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi) –
Cold tire pressure
Driver and passenger 175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm², 25 psi) –
Axle runout – 0.2 (0.01)
Radial – 0.3 (0.01)
Wheel rim runout
Axial – 0.3 (0.01)
Spring free length 390.3 (15.366) 363 (14.291)
Pipe runout – 0.20 (0.008)
Honda Ultra Cushion Oil No.10 (BAHA-
Recommended fluid –
Fork RAT SS-8)
Fluid level 144 mm (5.66 in) –
310 cm³ ± 2.5 cm³ (11.0 ± 0.08 USoz,
Fluid capacity –
11.5 ± 0.09 UKoz)
Steering head bearing preload 0.7 – 1.3 kgf (1.64 – 2.81 lbf) –
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Front brake disc bolt 90105 – KSP – 870 5 8 42 (4.3, 31) NOTE 2 Page 12–12
Front axle nut 90306 – KTE – 911 1 12 59 (5.9, 43) NOTE 3 Page 12–13
Handlebar upper holder bolt 90111 – 362 – 000 4 6 22 (2.2, 16) Page 12–6
Master cylinder holder bolt 96001 – 06022 – 07 2 6 9 (0.9,6.6) Page 12–9
Rear view mirror lock nut 90201 – MW3 – 620 2 10 34 (3.5, 26) Page 12–9
Fork socket bolt 90116 – KV3 – 7010 2 8 20 (2.0, 15) NOTE 2 Page 12–20
Fork cap 51450 – K43 – 901 2 33 22 (2.2, 16) Page 12–22
Bottom bridge pinch bolt 95701 – 10032 – 07 2 10 32 (3.2, 23) Page 12–22
Top bridge bolt 90101 – K43 – 900 2 8 22 (2.2, 16) Page 12–22
Steering bearing adjustment nut 53220 – KSP – 860 1 26 2.5 (0.25, 1.8) Page 12–26
Steering stem nut 90304 – KSP – 900 1 24 74 (7.5, 55) Page 12–27
12-1
TOOLS
Attachment, 37x40 mm Attachment, 42x47 mm Pilot, 15 mm

070GD002I150 07746-0010300 07746-0040300
Driver Bearing remover shaft Bearing remover head, 15 mm

07749-0010000 07746-0050100 07746-0050400
Piston remover front cushion Fork seal driver Socket wrench steering
070SRTKSP003 070SRTKSP001 070SRTKSP004
Ball race remover Steering cone installer (Frame) T-stem cone remover
070SRTKSP005 070SRTKSP007 07000TCR900
12-2
Steering cone installer

070SRTKSP006
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hard steering
• Steering stem adjusting nut too tight
• Damaged steering head bearing/race
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Faulty tire
Steers to one side or does not track straight
• Bent fork
• Bent front axle
• Wheel installed incorrectly
• Faulty steering head bearings
• Bent frame
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Worn swing arm pivot components
• Unevenly assembled left and right fork legs
• Unequal oil quantity in each fork leg
Front wheel wobbling
• Bent rim
• Worn or damaged wheel bearings
• Faulty tire
• Axle not tightened properly
Wheel turns hard
• Faulty wheel bearings
• Bent axle
• Brake drag
Soft suspension
• Weak fork spring
• Insufficient fluid in fork
Hard suspension
• Incorrect fork fluid viscosity
• Bent or damaged fork tubes
• Clogged fluid passage
• Damaged fork tube and/or fork slider
Front suspension noisy
• Insufficient fluid in fork
• Loose fork fasteners
12-3
HANDLEBAR REARVIEW MIRROR

REMOVAL
Remove the wire bands and rear view mirror.
WIRE BAND
Disconnect the front brake light switch connectors.

Remove the bolts, holder and brake master cylinder. MASTER CYLINDER
BOLTS
CONNECTORS HOLDER
Remove the starter switch housing screws and remove the

HOLDER
housing from the handle bar.
SCREWS STARTER SWITCH

HOUSING
Remove handlebar throttle housing screws (2 nos.) on

right hand side.
SCREWS
12-4
Disconnect the throttle cable from the throttle pipe, then

remove the handlebar. THROTTLE GRIP
HANDLEBAR
Remove the clutch wire connector.

CLUTCH WIRE
CONNECTOR
Remove the screws and separate the left handlebar switch

housing. LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH HOUSING
SCREWS
Pull out the handle bar grip with twisting movement in

outward direction. HANDLEBAR GRIP CLUTCH CABLE
Remove the clutch cable.
Remove the clutch lever bracket bolt and slide the bracket
out of the handle bar.
BOLT
12-5
Remove the bolts, handlebar upper holders and handlebar

from the top bridge. BOLTS
HANDLEBAR HOLDER
INSTALLATION
PUNCH MARKS HANDLEBAR
Place the handlebar to the top bridge.
Place the handlebar holders with the punch marks facing
forward and install the holder bolts.
Align the punch mark on the handlebar with the mating
surface of the lower holder.
Tighten the forward bolts first, then the rear bolts.
TORQUE: 22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 lbf.ft)
HOLDER Align
Slide and Install the clutch lever bracket by aligning the

CLUTCH LEVER
meeting surface of the bracket with the punch mark on
BRACKET
the handle bar.
Tighten the clutch lever bracket bolt.
Align
BOLT
Allow the Apply Honda Bond A or its equivalent to the inside surface
adhesive to dry of the grips and to the clean surface of the left handlebar.
for 1 hour before
Wait 3-5 minutes and install the grip.
using.
Rotate the grips for even application of the adhesive. HANDLEBAR GRIP
12-6
Install the left handlebar switch housing while aligning the

locating pin in the housing with the hole in the handlebar.
Align
Install the screw and tighten the forward screw first, then
the rear screw.
SCREWS
Connect the clutch wire connector.
CLUTCH WIRE
CONNECTOR
Apply grease to the throttle pipe rotating area of the

handlebar and install the throttle grip on the handle bar. THROTTLE GRIP
HANDLEBAR
12-7
Apply silicon grease to the throttle cable end.

THROTTLE CABLE
Connect the throttle cable end to the handlebar.
HANDLEBAR
Install the right handlebar switch housing, while aligning

its locating pin with the hole on the handlebar.
Install and tighten the throttle housing screws.
Align SCREWS
Install the starter switch housing on the handlebar while

aligning it’s locating pin. STARTER SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
Align
Install and tighten the starter switch housing screws.

HOLDER
SCREWS
12-8
Install the master cylinder bracket & holder with “UP” mark
facing up. MASTER CYLINDER
“UP” MARK
Aligning the mating surface of the bracket holder with the
punch mark on the handle bar.
Tighten the holder bolt to the specified torque.
BOLTS
HOLDER
Also connect the front brake light switch connector.
CONNECTORS
Install the wire bands and rear view mirrors.

REARVIEW MIRROR
Tighten the mirror mounting nuts to the specified torque.
Check & adjust the throttle grip free play (Page 3-5). ADAPTOR
Adjust the clutch lever free play (Page 3-22).
WIRE BAND
FRONT WHEEL
Tie down the ve- REMOVAL
hicle from rear Loosen the front axle nut.
side by using tie
down belt. Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist, raise
the front wheel off the ground.
Remove the front axle nut.
AXLE NUT
12-9
Do not operate Loosen the front axle pinch bolt.

the front brake
Remove the front axle and front wheel.
lever after the
front wheel is
removed.
FRONT AXLE
PINCH BOLT FRONT AXLE
Remove the side collar from both side of front wheel.
SIDE COLLAR
INSPECTION
AXLE
Place the axle on V-blocks. Turn the axle and measure the
runout using a dial indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.2mm (0.01 in)
WHEEL BEARING
Turn the inner race of each bearing with your finger.
Also check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the hub.
Remove and discard the bearings if the inner races do
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the hub.
12-10
WHEEL RIM WHEEL RIM DISC RUNOUT

Check the wheel rim runout by placing the wheel in a
turning stand.
Turn the wheel by hand and read the runout using a dial
indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Axial: 0.3 mm (0.01 in)
Radial: 0.3 mm (0.01 in)
BRAKE DISC
turning stand.
Spin then wheel by hand, and read the runout using a dial
indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Runout: 0.10 mm (0.004 in) VALVE STEM FRONT
WHEEL BALANCE DIRECTION
MARK
Carefully check balance before installing the wheel.
The wheel balance must be checked when the tire is
remounted.
For optimum balance the tire balance mark (light mass
point: a paint dot on the side wall) must be located next to
the valve stem. Remount the tire if necessary.
Note the rear direction marks on the tire, and upon tire
installation, always fit the tire so the marks face the same
direction. TYRE BALANCE MARK
DISASSEMBLY
BRAKE DISC
Place the wheel Remove the dust seal from the right wheel hub.
on a wooden
platform. Do not Loosen the brake disc mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern
reuse the bolts. in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the brake disc.
DUST SEAL BOLTS
Never install Install the bearing remover head into the bearing.
the old bearing, BEARING
From the opposite side, install the bearing remover shaft,
once the
and drive out the bearing from the wheel hub.
bearing has
been removed, Remove the distance collar, and drive out the other bearing.
the bearing
TOOLS:
must be
replaced with Bearing remover head, 15 mm 07746-0050400
new one.
Bearing remover shaft 07746-0050100
REMOVER HEAD REMOVER SHAFT
12-11
BRAKE DISC DUST SEAL

BEARING
ALLEN BOLT BEARING
42 N.m (4.3 kgf.m, 31 lbf.ft) DUST SEAL
SIDE COLLAR
SIDE COLLAR
DISTANCE COLLAR
Never install the Pack all bearing cavities with grease.

old bearing once
Drive in a new left bearing squarely with its sealed side
the bearing has DRIVER
facing up until it is fully seated.
been removed,
the bearing must Install the distance collar, then drive in a new left bearing
be replaced with squarely with its sealed side facing up.
new ones.
TOOLS:
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Pilot, 15 mm 07746-0040300
ATTACHMENT PILOT
Do not apply Install the brake disc onto the brake hub with the arrow
grease on the mark facing out. BRAKE DISC
brake disc or
Install and tighten new brake disc mounting bolts to the
stopping power
specified torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
will be reduced
Apply grease to a new right dust seal lip.
Install the dust seal until it is flat surface with the right
wheel hub.
DUST SEAL
BOLTS
12-12
INSTALLATION
Install the side collars both side onto the wheel hub.
SIDE COLLAR
Be careful not Install the front wheel between the fork legs so that the
to damage the brake disc is positioned between the pads.
pads.
Install the front axle from left side.
FRONT AXLE
Install and tighten the axle nut to the specified torque.

AXLE NUT
With the front brake applied, pump the forks up and down
several times to seat the axle and check brake operation.
12-13
Tighten the front axle pinch bolt to the specified torque.

Check the brake operation.
FRONT AXLE
PINCH BOLT
FORK
REMOVAL
–– Front fender (page 2-5) FRONT
Do not suspend Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts and brake caliper/ FENDOR
the brake bracket assembly.
caliper/ bracket
assembly from BOLTS
the brake hose.
Do not twist the
brake hose.
When the fork is ready to be disassembled, loosen the

fork socket bolts.
FORK SOCKET BOLT
Hold the fork legs and loosen the bottom bridge pinch bolts
and lower the fork legs, then remove it.
BOTTOM BRIDGE BOLTS
12-14
DISASSEMBLY
DUST SEAL
Be careful not to Remove the dust seal and stopper ring. STOPPER RING
scratch the fork
pipe.

FORK CAP SPRING COLLAR
–– Fork bolt
–– O-ring
–– Spring collar
–– Spring seat
O-RING SPRING SEAT
Remove the fork spring.
FORK SPRING
Drain the fork fluid by pumping the fork pipe several times
in a clean tray.
12-15
Do not Set the piston remover front cushion in a vise with a piece
overtighten of wood or soft jaws to avoid damage. PISTON REMOVER SOCKET BOLT/
the vise on the FRONT CUSHION SEALING WASHER
piston remover
front cushion.
If the fork piston Remove the fork socket bolt and sealing washer.
turns with the
TOOL:
socket bolt,
temporarily Piston remover front cushion: 070SRTKSP003
install the fork
spring, spring
seat, spring FORK PIPE FORK SLIDER
collar and fork
cap.
Using quick successive motions, pull the fork tube out of

the fork slider.
Remove the oil lock piece from the fork slider.
FORK SLIDER
FORK PIPE
OIL LOCK
PIECE

FORK PIPE OIL SEAL
–– Oil seal
–– Back-up ring
BACK-UP RING
–– Guide bushing
GUIDE
BUSHING
12-16
INSPECTION
FORK SPRING
Check the fork spring for fatigue or damage. Measure the
fork spring free length.
STANDARD: 363 mm (14.291 in)
FORK PIPE/SLIDER
FORK PIPE
Check the fork pipe and slider for score marks, scratches,
or excessive or abnormal wear.
FORK SLIDER
Place the fork pipe on V-blocks.

Turn the fork pipe and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
FORK PISTON/REBOUND SPRING/OIL LOCK PIECE

FORK PISTON REBOUND
Check the fork piston, piston ring and oil lock piece for SPRING
wear or damage.
Check the rebound spring for fatigue or damage.
Replace any components that are worn or damage.
PISTON RING
OIL LOCK PIECE
12-17
GUIDE BUSHING/SLIDER BUSHING/BACK-UP RING

SLIDER AND GUIDE BUSH
Visually inspect the slider and guide bushings.
Replace the bushings if there is excessive scoring or BACK-UP RING
scratching, or if the teflon is worn so the copper surface
appears on more than 3/4 of the entire surface.
Check the back-up ring; replace it if there is any distortion
at the points shown.
CHECK POINTS
COPPER SURFACE
Do not damage If the slider busing will be removed, carefully remove the
the slider slider bushing by prying the bushing gap with a
bushing,
screwdriver until the bushing can be pulled off by hand.
especially the
sliding surface. NOTE:
To prevent loss
Do not remove the slider bushing, unless it is necessary
of tension, do
to replace with a new one.
not open the
bushing more
than necessary.
SLIDER BUSING
FORK ASSEMBLY
22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 lbf.ft)
DUST SEAL FORK PIPE FORK CAP
STOPPER RING FORK PISTON RING
SPRING
COLLAR
OIL SEAL
BACK-UP RING O-RING

FORK
GUIDE BUSHING
PISTON
SPRING SET
FORK SLIDER
REBOUND
FLANGE BOLT SPRING
FORK SPRING
SLIDER BUSHING
SEALING
SOCKET BOLT WASHER
OIL LOCK PIECE
20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 15 lbf.ft)
12-18
Do not open Install the slider bushing being careful not to damage the
the bushing coating of the bushing, if it has been removed. OIL SEAL
slit more than
necessary. Remove the burrs from the bushing mating surface, being
careful not to peel off the coating.
BACK-UP RING
Install the oil Apply fork fluid to a new oil seal lips.
seal with its
marked side Install the guide bushing, back-up ring and oil seal onto
facing up. the fork tube.
GUIDE
BUSHING
Install the rebound spring to the fork piston and install them
REBOUND
into the fork pipe.
SPRING FORK PISTON
FORK PIPE
Install the oil lock piece onto the fork piston end.
FORK PIPE FORK PISTON
Install the fork pipe into the fork slider.
FORK SLIDER
OIL LOCK PIECE
Do not over- Set the fork slider in a vise with a piece of wood or soft
FORK SLIDER SEALING WASHER
tighten the vise jaws to avoid damage.
on the piston
Install a new sealing washer to the fork socket bolt.
remover front
cushion. Apply locking agent to the fork socket bolt threads and
install it.
FORK SOCKET BOLT
12-19
If the fork piston Tighten the fork socket bolt to the specified torque.
turns with the FORK SOCKET BOLT
socket bolt, tem-
porarily install
the fork spring,
spring seat,
spring collar and
fork bolt.
FORK SLIDER
Drive the oil seal until the stopper ring groove is visible DRIVER STOPPER RING
using the special tools.
GROOVE
TOOLS: OIL SEAL
Fork seal driver 07747-0010100
Fork seal driver attachment 07747-0010600
OIL SEAL
FORK SLIDER
Install the stopper ring into the groove of the fork slider
securely. DUST SEAL
STOPPER RING
Apply fork fluid to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal.
Pour the specified amount of recommended fork fluid into

the fork pipe.
RECOMMENDED FORK FLUID:
Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL No. 10 or equivalent
FORK FLUID CAPACITY: 144 mm
310 ± 2.5 cm3 (11.0 ± 0.08 US oz, 11.5 ± 0.09 UK oz) (5.66 in)
Slowly pump the fork pipe several times to remove any
trapped air from the lower portion of the fork pipe.
Compress the fork pipe fully and measure the fluid level
from the top of the fork pipe.
FLUID LEVEL: 144 mm (5.66 in)
12-20
Pull the fork pipe up and install the fork spring with the
tightly wound coil side facing down.
FORK SPRING
FORK PIPE
DOWN
Install the spring seat and spring collar.

SPRING COLLAR
SPRING SEAT
Tighten the Apply fork fluid to a new O-ring and install it onto the fork
fork bolt after bolt. FORK BOLT
installing the O-RING
Loosely install the fork bolt by pushing it to the fork pipe.
fork pipe into the
fork bridges.
FORK PIPE
INSTALLATION
Route the wires Install the fork leg through the bottom bridge and top bridge
and cables while aligning index line of fork pipe with the top surface
properly of top bridge.
(page 1-15).
Align
FORK SOCKET BOLT
12-21
Tighten the bottom bridge and top bridge pinch bolts to

the specified torque.
TORQUE:
Bottom bridge pinch bolt:
32 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
BOTTOM BRIDGE BOLTS
Top bridge fork socket bolt:

27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft) FRONT FORK BOLT
If the fork bolt is loosened, tighten the fork bolt to the
specified torque.
FORK SOCKET BOLT
NOTE:
Route the wire properly (page 1-15).
Install the front brake caliper/bracket assembly and tighten
new brake caliper mounting bolts to the specified torque.
FRONT
FENDOR
–– Front fendor (page 2-5)
BOLTS
STEERING STEM BOTTOM

BRIDGE BOLTS
REMOVAL
–– Front headlight RR (page 2-2)
–– Handlebar (page 12-9)
–– Front Forks (page 12-14)
Remove the bolts (2nos.) and brake hose stay from the
bottom bridge.
Disconnect the ignition switch 3P connector. FRONT BRAKE
HOSE STAY
12-22
Remove the steering stem nut, washer and top bridge. STEERING
STEM NUT
WASHER
Loosen the adjusting nut using the special tool.

SOCKET WRENCH
TOOL: STEERING
Socket wrench steering 070SRTKSP004
Hold the steering stem and remove the adjusting nut.

STEERING STEM
Be careful not to
Remove the following top cone race NUT
loose the steel
balls.
TOP CONE
RACE
Remove the following: UPPER STEEL

–– Upper steel ball (18) LOWER STEEL BALL (18)
–– Lower steel ball (18) BALL (18)
–– Bottom bridge
BOTTOM
BRIDGE
12-23
BALL RACE REPLACEMENT

Remove the top & bottom ball races using the special tool.
TOOL:
Ball race remover 070SRTKSP005
Install a new top ball race and new bottom ball race using
TOP BALL
the special tool. STEERING CONE
RACE
INSTALLER
TOOLS:
Steering cone installer 070SRTKSP006
BOTTOM BALL
RACE
BOTTOM CONE RACE REPLACEMENT

BOTTOM CONE
Remove the dust seal. RACE REMOVER
Remove the bottom cone race with a T-stem cone remover
MC tool, being careful not to damage the stem.
TOOL:
T-stem cone remover MC 07000TCR900 BOTTOM CONE RACE
Press a new bottom cone race onto the steering stem using
the special tool. BOTTOM CONE
RACE INSTALLER
TOOL:
Steering bottom cone installer 070SRTKSP007
BOTTOM CONE
12-24
STEERING STEM ASSEMBLY
74 N.m (7.5 kgf.m, 55 lbf.ft)

STEM NUT
ADJUSTING NUT
WASHER
TOP CONE RACE
UPPER STEEL
BALLS (18)
TOP BALL RACE
BOTTOM BALL RACE
LOWER STEEL
BALLS (18)
BOTTOM CONE RACE
DUST SEAL
STEERING STEM
Apply grease properly to bottom cone race & top ball race UPPER STEEL
and all other bearing area. BALL (18)
Install the steel balls in the bottom cone race and top ball LOWER STEEL
race. BALL (18)
Upper steel ball: 18
Lower steel ball: 18
BOTTOM
BRIDGE
Install the steering stem and top cone race.

TOP CONE
RACE
STEERING
STEM
12-25
Install the adjusting nut and tighten it to the specified torque.

ADJUSTING NUT
TOOL:
Socket wrench steering 070SRTKSP004
SOCKET WRENCH
STEERING
Turn the steering stem left and right several times.
Refer to torque Temporarily loosen the adjusting nut completely, then

wrench reading retighten the adjusting nut to the specified torque. ADJUSTING NUT
information
TOOL:
on page
12-1 ‘Service Socket wrench steering 070SRTKSP004
information’.
TORQUE:
Actual 2.5 N.m (0.25 kgf.m, 1.8 Ibf.ft)
Check that there is no vertical play and that the steering
stem rotates smoothly.
SOCKET WRENCH
STEERING
Install the top bridge.

TOP BRIDGE
Install the washer and steering stem nut.
WASHER STEERING STEM NUT
12-26
Loosen the Install the fork and temporarily tighten the top bridge bolts.
bottom pinch STEERING
Tighten the steering stem nut to the specified torque.
bolts when STEM NUT
tighten the stem TORQUE: 74 N.m (7.5 kgf.m, 55 Ibf.ft)
nut.
Turn the steering stem left and right several times and
recheck that there is no vertical play and that the steering
stem rotates smoothly.
–– Fork (page 12-21)
–– Handlebar (page 12-6)
–– Cover headlight RR (page 2-2)
–– Front cowl (page 2-2)
STEERING BEARING PRELOAD

Jack up the motorcycle to raise the front wheel off the
ground.
Position the steering stem to the straight ahead position.
Make sure that Hook a spring scale to the fork tube and measure the
there is no cable steering head bearing preload.
or wire harness
Pull the spring scale keeping the scale at a right angle to
interference.
the steering stem.
Read the scale at the point where the steering stem just
starts to move.
STEERING BEARING PRELOAD:
STANDARD: 0.7 – 1.3 kgf (1.64 – 2.81 lbf)
If the readings do not fall within the limits, readjust the
steering top thread.
12-27
COMPONENT LOCATION
44 N.m (4.4 kgf.m, 33 lbf.ft)
54 N.m (5.4 kgf.m, 40 lbf.ft)
44 N.m (4.4 kgf.m, 33 lbf.ft)
88 N.m (8.8 kgf.m, 65 lbf.ft)
13-0
13. REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
COMPONENT LOCATION 13-0 DRIVEN FLANGE 13-9
SERVICE INFORMATION 13-1 SHOCK ABSORBER 13-12
TROUBLESHOOTING13-3 SWINGRAM13-13
REAR WHEEL 13-4
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
• Riding on damaged rims impairs safe operation of the vehicle.

• When servicing the rear wheel and suspension, support the vehicle using a center stand or hoist.
• A contaminated brake drum or shoe reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated shoes, and clean a contaminated drum
with a high quality brake degreasing agent.
• After the rear wheel installation, check the brake operation by applying the brake pedal.
• Refer to the brake system information (page 14-1).
• This vehicle is equipped with the TUBELESS tyre.
• The TUBELESS tyres does not use any inner tube, its inner layer (inner liner ) used as instead of tube. Only tubeless tyre is
mounted on the rim. Follow bellow caution:
–– Loose the tyre bid from rim with the help of bid breaker. Demount the tyre using a tyre demounting machine.
–– In nail hole puncture case drill the puncture hole to make the inner surface of the puncture hole smooth & to remove
contamination
–– In pin hole puncture case mark the puncture hole on inner side. Clean the buffed area & apply chemical vulcanizing solution
in the buffed area and in the hole.
13
• Apply soap water for smooth sliding -in of the wheel rim inside the tyre beading portion.
• When a tire rim is wet or a tire seems under-inflated, check for any abnormalities on the tire and repair if necessary.
• Do not use lever or hamrage for demounting the tyre otherwise it breaks the bid or damage the rim.
• Tyre mounting /demounting must be done only with machine to avoid rim damage.
• Always use a new TUBELESS tyre that is proper for tire size when replacing.
• Correct the tyre pressure as per specification.
13-1

Cold tire pressure
Radial – 0.3 (0.04) Page 13–6
Wheel rim runout
Axial – 0.3 (0.04) Page 13–6
Size/link 428/132 – Page 3–17
Drive chain
Slack 25 - 35 (0.984 - 1.37) 50 (1.96) Page 3–16
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Rear brake arm 90302 – KTE – 911 1 6 10 (1.0, 7.3) NOTE 3 –
Rear brake disc bolt 90105 – KSP – 870 4 8 42 (4.3, 31) Page 13–12
Driven sprocket nut 90304 – KTE – 911 4 10 64 (6.4, 47) NOTE 3 Page 13–12
Rear axle nut 90305 – KYJ – 711 1 16 88 (8.8, 65) NOTE 3 Page 13–9
Shock absorber mounting nut 90304 – KTE – 911 2 10 44 (4.4, 32) NOTE 3 Page 13–13
Shock absorber mounting bolt Upper 90153 – KYJ – 900 1 10 44 (4.4, 32) NOTE 3 Page 13–13
Shock absorber mounting bolt Lower 90151 – KSP – 900 1 10 44 (4.4, 32) Page 13–13
Swing arm pivot bolt 90121 – KSP – 900 1 14 54 (5.4, 40) NOTE 3 Page 13–17
TOOLS
Pilot, 12 mm Pilot, 17 mm Attachment, 42x47 mm
070GD004I130 070GD004I150 07746-0010300
Bearing remover shaft Bearing remover head, 15 mm Driver

07746-0050100 07746-0050400 070GD001I100
13-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
Rear wheel wobbling
• Bent rim
• Worn or damaged driven flange bearing
• Faulty tire
• Worn or damaged swingarm bushings
• Bent frame or swingarm
• Axle not tightened properly
Wheel turns hard
• Brake drag
• Faulty wheel bearings
• Faulty driven flange bearing
• Bent axle
• Drive chain too tight (page 3-16)
Soft suspension
• Incorrect suspension adjustment
• Weak shock absorber springs
• Oil leakage from damper unit
Hard suspension
• Incorrect suspension adjustment
• Bent shock absorber damper rod
• Damaged suspension or swingarm pivot bushings
• Bent swingarm pivot or frame
Steers to one side or does not track straight
• Drive chain adjusters not adjusted equally
• Bent axle
• Bent frame and/or swingarm
• Damaged swingarm pivot bushings
Rear suspension noise
• Loose suspension fasteners
• Worn or damaged suspension pivot bushings
• Faulty shock absorber
13-3
REAR WHEEL LOCK NUT AXLE NUT
DISC TYPE
REMOVAL
Loosen the lock nut, drive chain adjusting nut,and rear
axle nut.
Push the real wheel forward and derail the drive chain from
driven sprocket
Remove the rear axle nut, rear axle and adjusting plates. RIGHT ADJUSTING
PLATE
Remove the rear wheel. AXLE SHAFT
• Do not hang the caliper by the brake hose. BOLTS DUST SEAL
• Do not twist the brake hose.
• Do not operate the brake pedal after removing the
rear wheel.
DISASSEMBLY
Inspect the brake disc before disassembly (page 13-5)
Remove driven flange (page 13-9)
Remove the brake disc mounting bolts, collar and brake
disc.
Remove the dust seal. SIDE COLLAR BRAKE DISC
DRUM TYPE RIGHT ADJUSTING PLATE

AXLE NUT
REMOVAL
Remove the rear brake adjusting nut
Push the brake pedal down and remove the brake rod
from the joint piece.
ADJUSTING NUT
JOINT PIECE ROD SPRING
DISASSEMBLY
Remove driven flange (page 13-9)
Remove the brake panel assembly from the right side of
wheel hub.
BRAKE PANEL
13-4
INSPECTION
Before inspection remove the wheel rubber dampers and
wheel bearings.
RUBBER DAMPERS
WHEEL BEARING REMOVAL

REMOVER SHAFT
Install the remover head into the bearing.
From the opposite side, install the bearing remover shaft
and drive the bearing out of the wheel hub.
BEARING
Remove the distance collar and drive out the other bearing.
TOOLS:
Bearing remover head, 15 mm 07746-0050400
Bearing remover shaft 07746-0050100
REMOVER HEAD
AXLE
Set the axle in V-blocks. Trun the axle and measure the
runout using a dial indicator.
WHEEL BEARING
Replace the Turn the inner race of each bearing with your finger.
bearings in
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
pairs.
Also check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the hub.
Remove and discard the bearings if the inner races do
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the hub.
13-5
WHEEL RIM
turning stand.
indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Radial: 0.3 mm (0.04 in)
Axial: 0.3 mm (.04 in)
BRAKE DISC
turning stand.
indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Runout: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
WHEEL BALANCE
VALVE STEM
Carefully check balance before installing the wheel.
The wheel balance must be checked when the tire is
remounted.
For optimum balance the tire balance mark (light mass
point: a paint dot on the side wall) must be located next to
the valve stem. Remount the tire if necessary.
TYRE BALANCE MARK
Note the rear direction marks on the tire, and upon tire REAR DIRECTION MARK
installation, always fit the tire so the marks face the
same direction.
13-6
ASSEMBLY OF DISC BRAKE

COLLAR
DUST
SEAL BEARING
AXLE NUT
SWINGARM
WASHER
BOLTS DAMPER BEARING

RUBBER
DRIVEN SPROCKET
REAR DISC ASSEMBLY
COLLAR
DISTANCE COLLAR
SWINGARM
WASHER
O-RING
AXLE BOLT
ASSEMBLY OF DRUM BRAKE
BEARINGS
AXLE NUT
DAMPER BEARING
SWINGARM RUBBER
WASHER DRIVEN SPROCKET
ASSEMBLY
REAR DRUM
COLLAR
BRAKE
CIRCLIP
DISTANCE SWINGARM
COLLAR WASHER
O-RING
AXLE BOLT
13-7
WHEEL BEARING
Pack new bearing cavities with grease.
Drive in a new left side bearing squarely with the sealed
side facing up until it is fully seated.
Apply a thin coat of grease to the distance collar and
install it.
Drive in a new left side bearing with the sealed side facing
up.
TOOLS:
Attachment. 42 x 47 mm 070GD-002I160
ATTACHMENT
Pilot, 15 mm 07746-0040300
INSTALLATION
DUST SEAL
DISC TYPE
BOLTS
Install the brake disc.
Install and tighten the brake disc mounting bolts and apply
thread lock in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
Install the side collar and dust seal.
SIDE COLLAR BRAKE DISC
Install the wheel rubber dampers.
RUBBER DAMPERS
Be careful not Carefully hold and slide the rear bracket assembly on the
to damage slot given on rear bracket assembly by aligning with the BRAKE CALIPER
the brake protrusion given on swingarm and install the rear wheel
pads while and drive chain.
installation.
Install the driven flange, adjusting bolts & swing-arm washer. AXLE NUT
Slide the disk towards the engine to install rear wheel
between the brake pads. Hold the wheel upwards and
install axle shaft from swing-arm to the left side. Install axle
nut and tighten to specified torque. AXLE
SHAFT
Check for the chain slackness. RIGHT ADJUSTING
PLATE
13-8
DRUM TYPE
Do not apply Install the brake panel assembly from the right side of
grease on the wheel hub.
brake drum and
Install the driven flange assembly (page 13-11).
shoe linings
Slide the rear wheel such that the slot given on panel could PROTRUSION
align with the protrusion given on swingarm and install the
drive chain.
BRAKE PANEL SLOT
Hold the wheel up and Install rear Axle shaft from left
RIGHT ADJUSTING PLATE
hand side. Install Adjusting Plates and screw axle nut to AXLE NUT
specified torque.
TORQUE: 88 N.m (8.97 kgf.m, 64.9 Ibf. ft)
Install rod spring and after pushing down the brake pedal
connect the brake rod by inserting it into the Joint Piece.
Tighten the adjusting nut at the end of the rod.
ADJUSTING NUT
Adjust brake free play (page 3-22).
Install drive chain (page 3-18).
JOINT PIECE ROD SPRING
DRIVEN FLANGE AXLE SHAFT AXLE NUT
REMOVAL
Remove the rear wheel (page 13-4).
RIGHT ADJUSTING
PLATE
DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION SIDE COLLAR

DUST SEAL
DRIVEN SPROCKET
Remove the side collar and dust seal.
13-9
Remove the driven sprocket nuts and driven sprocket.

DRIVEN
SPROCKET
NUTS
Check the condition of the driven sprocket teeth.

Replace the sprocket if it is worn or damaged.
• If the driven sprocket requires replacement inspect the
drive chain and drive sprocket.
• Never install a new drive chain on a worn sprocket or a
worn chain on new sprockets. Both chain and sprocket
must be in good condition, or the replacement chain or
sprocket will wear rapidly.
Drive out the driven flange bearing.

BEARING
DRIVEN FLANGE
DRIVEN FLANGE BEARING

Turn the inner race of bearing with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Also check
that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the driven flange.
Remove and discard the bearing if they do not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the driven flange.
13-10
DRIVEN FLANGE ASSEMBLY
BEARING
OIL SEAL
DRIVEN FLANGE
STUD BOLT
64 N.m (6.5 kgf.m, 47 lbf.ft)
DRIVEN FLANGE BEARING

Pack new bearing cavities with grease.
Drive in a new bearing squarely until it is fully seated.
TOOLS:
Attachment. 42 x 47 mm 070GD-002I160
Pilot, 15 mm 07746-0040300
DRIVEN SPROCKET
Install the driven sprocket nuts with the chamfered side
facing out.
Install the nuts and tighten them to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 64 N.m (6.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibf. ft)
NUTS
13-11
Apply grease to the lip of a new dust seal.

DUST SEAL
Install the collar.
Install the rear wheel (page 13-8).
SIDE COLLAR
SHOCK ABSORBER SHOCK ABSORBER
REMOVAL
Place the motorcycle on its center stand.
–– Drive chain case (page 13-0)
–– Remove rear wheel (page 13-4)
Remove the shock absorber lower mounting nut and bolt.
BOLT
NUT
Remove the shock absorber upper mounting nut, bolt and MOUNTING NUT
shock absorber.
INSPECTION
SHOCK ABSORBER
Visually inspect the shock absorber for wear, leakage or
damage.
–– Damper rod for bend or damage.
–– Damper unit for leakage or other damage.
–– Bushing for wear or damage.
Replace the shock absorber as an assembly if necessary.
BUSHES
13-12
Shock absorber INSTALLATION MOUNTING NUT

shall be installed
with adjust label Install the shock absorber.
right side. Install the upper mounting nut and bolt. BOLT
Install the lower bolt and nut.

SHOCK ABSORBER
Tighten the lower mounting nut to the specified torque.
–– Drive chain case (page 13-0)
–– Rear wheel (page 13-8)
BOLT
NUT
SWINGARM DRIVE CHAIN

UPPER CASE
Remove the rear wheel (page 13-4).
Remove the mounting bolts (4 nos.) and drive chain upper
and lower case
DRIVE CHAIN
LOWER CASE BOLTS
For Disc type:

Remove the rear brake calliper hose mounting
bolts (2 nos.) and carefully hold the brake calliper slider.
REAR BRAKE
HOSE BOLTS
13-13
Carefully hold the brake calliper slider.
Remove the shock absorber lower mounting nut and bolt.

SHOCK ABSORBER
BOLT
NUT
Remove the swingram pivot nut.

Remove the swingarm pivot bolt and swingarm.
PIVOT BOLT
PIVOT NUT
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the chain slider while releasing the bosses DUST
(3 nos.) from the tabs. SEAL
BOSSES
CHAIN SLIDER
13-14
Check the chain slider for wear or damage.

The chain slider must be replaced if it is worn to the wear
limit cutout.
Remove the dust seal.

DUST SEAL
Remove the collars.
COLLARS
Inspect the swingarm dust seal, collar.

DUST SEAL
Check the swingarm for any damage.
SWINGARM
COLLARS
DUST SEAL
13-15
Remove the needle bearings from the swingarm.

TOOLS:
Bearing remover set, 20 mm 07936-3710600
Remover handle 07936-3710100 BEARING
Remover weight 070MC-KPLI300
SWINGARM
ASSEMBLY
DUST SEAL SWINGRAM
COLLAR
NEEDLE BEARING
DUST SEAL
CHAIN SLIDER
COLLAR
NEEDLE BEARING
DUST SEAL
Apply grease to the new needle bearings.

Press the needle bearings into the swingarm so that the
needle bearing surface is 7 mm (0.3 in) from the end of
swingarm pivot, using the special tools and a hydraulic 7 mm (0.3 in)
press.
TOOLS:
Attachment, 24 x 26 mm 070GD-002I120
Pilot, 20 mm 070GD-004I160
BEARING
13-16
Apply grease to the collars surface and install them into

swing arm pivots.
COLLARS
Apply grease to the dust seal.

DUST SEAL
Install the chain slider while aligning the bosses (3 nos.)

with tabs.
DUST
SEAL
BOSSES
CHAIN SLIDER
INSTALLATION LEFT SIDE VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW

Install the swingram pivot bolt and nut.
Tighten the pivot nut to the specified torque.
PIVOT BOLT
PIVOT NUT
13-17
Install the shock absorber lower mounting bolt and nut.

SHOCK ABSORBER
Tighten the nut to the specified Torque.
BOLT
NUT
Install the rear brake caliper hose and tighten the

bolts (2 nos.).
REAR BRAKE
HOSE BOLTS
Install the drive chain upper and lower case and tighten DRIVE CHAIN
the bolts (4 nos.). UPPER CASE
DRIVE CHAIN
LOWER CASE BOLTS

BRAKE CALIPER
AXLE NUT
RIGHT ADJUSTING
AXLE SHAFT PLATE
13-18
MEMO
BRAKE SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION
CBS FRONT BRAKE: 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6 lbf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Calliper bleeder valve

5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

STD 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

CBS REAR BRAKE:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,

9 lbf·ft)
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m,

13 lbf·ft)
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
14-0
14. BRAKE SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION 14-0 FRONT BRAKE CALIPER 14-14
SERVICE INFORMATION 14-1 REAR BRAKE 14-19
TROUBLESHOOTING14-2 REAR MASTER CYLINDER(CBS ONLY)14-21
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/ REAR BRAKE CALIPER 14-24
AIR BLEEDING 14-3
BRAKE PEDAL 14-27
BRAKE PAD/DISK 14-7
REAR DRUM BRAKE 14-30
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER 14-9
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA - approved vacuum cleaner.
Spilling brake fluid will severely damage instrument lenses and painted surface. It is also harmful to some rubber parts.
Be careful whenever you remove the reservoir cover; make sure the front reservoir is horizontal first.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake de greasing agent.
• Check the brake system by applying the brake lever or pedal after the air bleeding.
• Never allow contaminates (dirt, water, etc.) to get into an open reservoir.
• Once the hydraulic system has been opened, or if the brake feels spongy, the system must be bleed.
• Always use fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container when servicing the system. Do not mix different types
of fluid, they may not be compatible.
• Always check brake operation before riding the motorcycle.
• This section covers service of the combi brake components of the brake system.
SPECIFICATIONS
Unit: mm (in)
Page NO.
14
Brake disc thickness 3.8 – 4.6 (0.14 – 0.15) 3.5 (0.13) Page 14–8
Brake disc runout – 0.10 (0.004) Page 14–9
STD 12.700 – 12.743 (0.4999 – 0.5017) 12.775 (0.5029) Page 14–11
Master cylinder I.D.
CBS 12.700 – 12.743 (0.4999 – 0.5017) 12.775 (0.5029) Page 14–11
FRONT BRAKE STD 12.657 – 12.684 (0.4983 – 0.4994) 12.645 (0.4978) Page 14–11
Master piston O.D.
AND MASTER CBS 12.657 – 12.684 (0.4983 – 0.4994) 12.645 (0.4978) Page 14–11
CYLINDER Caliper cylinder I.D. (STD) 25.400 – 25.450 (1.0000 – 1.0020) 25.460 (1.0024) Page 14–17
Caliper cylinder I.D. Cylinder A 22.650 – 22.700 (0.8917 – 0.8937) 22.710 (0.8941) Page 14–15
(CBS) Cylinder B 27.000 – 27.050 (1.0629 – 1.0649) 25.460 (1.0023) Page 14–15
Caliper piston O.D. (STD) 25.318 – 25.368 (0.9968 – 0.9987) 25.31 (0.996) Page 14–17
Caliper piston O.D. Piston A 22.585 – 22.618 (0.8891 – 0.8904) 22.577 (0.888) Page 14–15
(CBS) Piston B 26.935 – 26.968 (1.0604 – 0.8905) 26.927 (1.060) Page 14–15
REAR MASTER Master cylinder I.D. 14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529) 14.055 (0.5533) Page 14–22
CYLINDER Master piston O.D. 13.957 – 12.984 (0.5495 – 0.5529) 13.945 (0.5490) Page 14–22
(CBS/ Caliper cylinder I.D. 33.960 – 34.010 (1.3370 – 1.3389) 34.020 (1.3393) Page 14–25
DISC TYPE) Caliper piston O.D. 33.878 - 33.928 (1.3337 – 1.3357) 33.87 (1.333) Page 14–25
Brake pedal height 64.0 – 66.0 (2.51 – 2.59) – Page 14–23
Brake pedal free play 20 – 30 (0.787 – 1.178) – Page 3–20
REAR
Brake drum I.D. 130.0 - 130.2 (5.11 - 5.12) 131.0 (5.16) Page 14–30
(Drum Type)
Lining thickness To the Indicator –
14-1
BRAKE SYSTEM
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Caliper bleeder valve 43352 – 568 – 0030 1 8 5.4 (0.55, 4) Page 14–5
FR Master cylinder cap 93600 – 04012 – 1G 2 4 1.5 (0.15, 1.1) Page 14–6
RR Master cylinder cap 43516 – K43911 2 4 1.5 (0.15, 1.1) –
Brake caliper mounting bolt 90131 – KYJ – 7101 2 8 30 (3.0, 22) Page 14–16
FR brake light switch screw 90508 – K21 – 921 1 4 1.2 (1.2, 0.9) Page 14–13
Brake lever pivot bolt(Disk) 90114 – 166 – 006 1 6 1.0 (0.1, 0.7) Page 14–13
Brake lever pivot nut (Disk) 94050 – 06000 1 6 5.9 (0.59, 4.4) Page 14–13
Brake hose oil bolt 90145 – GAZ – 981 2 10 34 (3.4, 25) Page 14–16
FR caliper secondery pin (STD) 45131 – GZ0 – 006 1 8 17.2 (1.7, 12) –
FR caliper hanger pin (STD) 45215 – KPH – 951 1 10 17.2 (1.7, 12) –
FR brake caliper pin (CBS) 45131 – ML7 – 921 1 8 22 (0.6, 16) NOTE 2 –
FR brake caliper hangar pin (CBS) 45215 – MBT – D51 1 10 17.2 (1.7, 12) Page 14–8
CBS M/C joint nut 95701 – 06022 – 08 1 6 17.2 (1.7, 12) –
CBS M/C holder bolts 90701 – 06022 – 08 2 6 12 (1.2, 8.8) Page 14–23
Brake pipe joint nut 46312 – VMO – 770 1 10 14 (1.4, 10) –
TROUBLESHOOTING
FRONT/ REAR DISC BRAKE REAR DRUM BRAKE
Brake lever soft or spongy Poor brake performance
• Air in hydraulic system • Improperly adjusted brake
• Leaking hydraulic system • Worn brake linings
• Contaminated brake pad/disc • Worn brake drum
• Worn caliper piston seal • Worn brake cam
• Worn master cylinder piston cups • Improperly installed brake linings
• Worn brake pad/disc • Brake cable sticking/needs lubrication
• Contaminated caliper • Contaminated brake linings
• Contaminated master cylinder • Contaminated brake drum
• Caliper not sliding properly • Worn brake shoes at cam contact area
• Low brake fluid level • Improper engagement between brake arm and serrations
• Clogged fluid passage
• Warped/deformed brake disc Brake lever hard or slow return
• Sticking/worn caliper piston • Worn/broken return spring
• Sticking/worn master cylinder piston • Improperly adjusted brake
• Bent brake lever • Sticking brake drum due to contamination
Brake lever hard •
•
Worn brake shoes at cam contact area
Brake cable sticking/needs lubrication
• Clogged/restricted brake system • Improperly installed brake linings
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Caliper not sliding properly Brake squeaks
• Worn caliper piston seal • Worn brake linings
• Sticking/worn master cylinder piston • Worn brake drum
• Bent brake lever • Contaminated brake linings
Brake drags • Contaminated brake drum
• Contaminated brake pad/disc

• Misaligned wheel
• Badly worn brake pad/disc
• Warped/deformed brake disc
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Clogged/restricted fluid passage
• Sticking caliper piston
14-2
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE FLUID LINE (CBS)
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER
PCV
BRAKE HOSE CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE CALIPER FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
DELAY VALVE
BRAKE HOSE
CONNECTOR
REAR MASTER CYLINDER
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/ SET PLATE/
AIR BLEEDING
DIAPHRAGM
SCREWS
Cover the BRAKE FLUID DRAINING
painted parts
and the FRONT DISC BRAKE:
surrounding
Support the motorcycle on it’s center stand.
area of master
cylinder by shop Turn the handlebar until the reservoir is parallel to the
cloth to avoid ground.
paint surface
Remove the reservoir cover screws, reservoir cover, set
damage due
plate and diaphragm. RESERVOIR COVER
to brake fluid
seepage.
Connect bleed hose to the front brake caliper to bleed

valve. BLEED HOSE
Loosen the bleed valve and pump the brake lever until no
more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
Tighten the bleed valve.
BLEED VALVE
14-3
BRAKE SYSTEM
COMBI BRAKE SYSTEM: SET PLATE/

Do not allow Combine brake system (page 14-3) consist of two individual DIAPHRAGM
foreign material hydraulic circuit, the front brake line and CBS line. SCREWS
to enter the • Front brake line - Draining procedure same as front
system when brake non CBS
filling the
• CBS brake line & Rear brake line - Follow the below
reservoir.
process:
When using a
commercially CBS BRAKE LINE:
available
brake bleeder, Remove the right side cover (page 2-3).
follow the Remove the mounting bolt of brake fluid reservoir. Remove RESERVOIR COVER
manufacture’s reservoir cover screw, reservoir cover, set-plate and
operating
diaphragm.
instructions.
Connect the bleed hose to the CBS bleed valve of the CBS BLEED VALVE
front brake caliper.
Loosen the bleed valve and pump the rear brake padel
until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
BLEED HOSE
REAR BRAKE LINE:

BLEED VALVE
Connect a bleed hose to the rear brake caliper bleed valve.
Loosen the bleed valve and pump the rear brake pedal
until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
BLEED HOSE
BRAKE FLUID FILLING/AIR BLEEDING

FRONT BRAKE (DISC):
If a brake bleeder/automatic refill system is available
then use the following steps:
Do not mix Connect the automatic refill system to the reservoir, follow
different types of the manufacturer’s operation instruction.
fluid. These are Connect the commercially available brake bleeder to the
not compatible front caliper bleed valve.
Perform the bleeding procedure until the system is
completely flushed/ bleed.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake caliper FRONT MASTER CYLINDER
bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N.m (0.6 kgf.m, 4.0 lbf.ft)
14-4
BRAKE SYSTEM
If a brake bleeder is not available then use the following

CBS BLEED NON CBS BLEED
steps:
HOSE HOSE
Do not mix Fill the reservoir with DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid from a
different types of sealed container.
fluid. These are
Connect a bleed hose to the front brake caliper bleed valve.
not compatible
STEP 1: Pressurize the system with the brake lever until
lever resistance is felt.
STEP 2: Squeeze the brake lever, open the bleed valve ¼ turn
and then close the valve.
NOTE:
• Do not release the lever until the bleed valve has been BLEED VALVE BLEED VALVE
closed.
• If an automatic refill system is not used, add brake fluid
when the fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• Check the fluid level often while bleeding the brakes to
prevent air from being pumped into the system.
• If air is entering the bleeder from around the bleed valve
threads, seal the threads with teflon tape.
Repeat steps 1. and 2. until air bubbles do not appear in
the bleed hose.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake caliper
COMBI BRAKE SYSTEM (CBS)

Combine brake system (page 14-3) consist of two individual
hydraulic circuit, the front brake line and CBS line.
• Front brake line - Bleeding procedure same as front
brake non CBS
• Rear brake line and CBS brake line - Bleeding
procedure follow the below process
Note: Always bleed the rear brake line first before bleeding
the CBS brake line.
REAR BRAKE
If a brake bleeder/automatic refill system is available
then use the following steps:
Connect the automatic refill system to the reservoir, follow
the manufacturer’s operation instruction.
BLEED VALVE
Connect the commercially available brake bleeder to the
Rear bleed valve.
Perform the bleeding procedure until the system is
completely flushed/ bleed.
BLEED HOSE
14-5
BRAKE SYSTEM
If a brake bleeder is not available then use the following

steps:
Connect the bleed hose to the rear calliper bleed valve.
Add the brake fluid to the rear reservoir if the fluid level is
below the lower mark.
STEP 1: Pressurize the system with the rear brake pedal
until lever resistance is felt.
STEP 2: Squeeze the brake pedal and open the bleed
valve ¼ turn and then close the valve.
NOTE:
• Do not release the pedal until the bleed valve has been
closed.
• If an automatic refill system is not used, add brake fluid
when the fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• Check the fluid level often while bleeding the brakes to
prevent air from being pumped into the system.
• If air is entering the bleeder from around the bleed valve
threads, seal the threads with teflon tape.
Repeat steps 1. and 2. until air bubbles do not appear in
the bleed hose.
UPPER LEVEL
CBS BRAKE CBS BLEED VALVE

Connect the bleed valve to the front caliper CBS bleed
valve and follow the bleeding process as mention in rear
brake bleeding process step 1 and step 2.
BLEED HOSE
Install the diaphragm, set plate, reservoir cover and SET PLATE/
reservoir cover screws, then tighten the screws to the DIAPHRAGM
specified torque.
SCREWS
Install the reservoir and tighten reservoir mounting bolt.
MOUNTING BOLT
Make sure that rear brake rod is connected with pedal.

Adjust brake pedal free play with 20-30 mm. After that, RESERVOIR COVER
do the CBS brake bleeding.
14-6
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE PAD/DISC CBS DISC
FRONT BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT

(CBS AND DISC)
Always replace Push the caliper pistons all the way in to facilitate installation
the brake pads of new brake pads (giving some space).
in pairs to
assure even NOTE:
disc pressure. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder
reservoir as this operation causes the level to rise.
CALIPER BODY
Remove the brake pad hanger pin by unscrewing it with

CBS DISC
the help of wrench.
Check the pad pin for abnormal wear or distortion.
Replace if necessary.
PAD HANGER PIN
Do not operate Remove the brake pads. CBS DISC

the rear brake
Clean the brake caliper inside especially around the piston.
pedal or front
brake lever after Install new brake pads if found below specification.
the brake pads
are removed.
BRAKE PAD
INSTALLATION CBS DISC

Make sure the pad spring is installed in position. BRACKET
Align
PAD
SPRING
BRAKE
PADS
14-7
BRAKE SYSTEM
Be careful not to Install the new brake pad into the caliper. CBS DISC
apply grease on
brake pads.
BRAKE PAD
Lubricate the pad pin with silicone grease before installation.
O- RING
PAD PIN
Install the brake pad pin by pushing the pads against the
CBS DISC
pad spring to align the pad pin holes in the pads and caliper.
Drive the pad pin into the caliper.
TORQUE:17.2 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft)
PAD PIN
FRONT BRAKE DISC INSPECTION

Visually inspect the brake disc for damage or cracks.
Measure the brake disc thickness at several points.
Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less
than service limit.
14-8
BRAKE SYSTEM
Check the brake disc warpage using a dial indicator.

Check the wheel bearings for excessive play, if the warpage
exceeds the service limit.
Replace the brake disc if the wheel bearings are normal.
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER BRAKE SEALING

HOSE WASHERS
REMOVAL
Remove the right rear view mirror with rear view mirror
adapter (page 12-4).
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors (page 17-12).
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system (page 14-3).
Remove the brake hose by removing the oil bolt and
sealing washers.
OIL BOLT
Remove the bolts, holder and master cylinder assembly.

MASTER CYLINDER HOLDER
BOLT
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the brake lever pivot nut, pivot bolt and brake lever.
BRAKE LEVER
BOLT
14-9
BRAKE SYSTEM
Remove the screw and brake light switch.

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
SCREW
Remove the boot.

Remove the snap ring from the master cylinder body using
snap ring pliers. SNAP RING
BOOT
Remove the master piston and spring from the master

cylinder. MASTER CYLINDER
SPRING
MASTER PISTON
Clean the inside of the master cylinder and master piston MASTER CYLINDER
with clean brake fluid.
MASTER PISTON
14-10
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSPECTION
Check the master piston for scoring, scratches or damage.
Measure the master piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: DISC - 12.657 mm (0.4978 in)
Keep the pis- Check the master cylinder for scoring, scratches or
ton, spring, snap damage.
ring and boot as
Measure the master cylinder I.D.
a set. Do not
substitute SERVICE LIMIT: DISC - 12.755 mm (0.5022 in)
individual part.
ASSEMBLY
1.5 N.m (0.2 kgf.m, 1.1 lbf.ft)
RESERVOIR
CAP
MASTER CYLINDER
DIAPHRAGM
SPRING PLATE
MASTER PISTON
DIAPHRAGM
SNAP RING
BOOT
PIVOT BOLT
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
PIVOT NUT
1.2 N.m (0.1 kgf.m, 0.9 lbf.ft)
14-11
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
MASTER CYLINDER
Apply clean brake fluid to the master piston.
Install the spring onto the piston end, and install it into the
SPRING
master cylinder.
MASTER PISTON
Be certain the Install the snap ring into the groove in the master cylinder.
snap ring is
firmly seated
in the groove
SNAP RING
BOOT
Apply grease to boot and install it to the master cylinder.

NOTE:
If seal is found damage replace the master cylinder piston BOOT
set.
Install the brake light switch to the master cylinder by

aligning the brake light switch boss with master cylinder
hole. BRAKE LIGHT
SWITCH
ALIGN
14-12
BRAKE SYSTEM
Install and tighten the brake light switch screw to the

specified torque. BRAKE LIGHT
TORQUE: 1.2 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.9 lbf·ft) SWITCH
SCREW
Apply grease to the brake lever pivot bolt rotating surface.

Install the brake lever to the master cylinder.
Install and tighten the pivot bolt to the specified torque. BRAKE LEVER
TORQUE:1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

Install and tighten the pivot nut while holding the pivot bolt
BOLT
TORQUE: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4 lbf·ft)
INSTALLATION OF MASTER CYLINDER MASTER CYLINDER HOLDER

Place the master cylinder assembly on the handlebar.
Place the master cylinder holder with up mark facing
forward, and install the bolts.
Align the end of the master cylinder with the punch mark
on the handlebar. UP MARK
Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.

BOLT
Rest the brake hose joint between the stoppers on the

BRAKE SEALING
master cylinder.
HOSE WASHERS
Install the brake hose to the master cylinder with the oil
bolt and new sealing washers.
Tighten the oil bolt to the specified torque.
Connect the brake light switch connectors.
Fill the brake fluid, and bleed the air for the hydraulic
system (page 14-4).
Install the right rear view mirror.
OIL BOLT
14-13
BRAKE SYSTEM
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER

CBS FRONT BRAKE
REMOVAL BOLTS
Remove the brake pads (page 14-7). OIL BOLT
sealing washer.
Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts and brake caliper.
SEALING WASHERS
DISASSEMBLY CALIPER PAD RETAINER CALIPER BRACKET

Remove the caliper bracket from the caliper body. BODY
Remove the pad spring and bracket pin boot from the
caliper body.
Remove the pad retainer and caliper pin boot from the
caliper bracket.
If the bracket pin boot is hard or deteriorated, replace it
with a new one.
CALIPER
PIN BOOT
BRACKET
PIN BOOT PAD SPRING
Do not use high Place a shop towel over the caliper pistons.
pressure air or
Position the caliper body with the piston down, and apply
bring the
small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet to remove the
nozzle too close
caliper pistons.
to the inlet.
Be careful not to Push the dust seals and piston seals in, and lift them out.
PISTON SEAL
damage the
Clean the seal grooves, caliper piston sliding surfaces and
piston
caliper pistons with clean brake fluid.
sliding surface.
DUST SEAL
14-14
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSPECTION CALIPER CALIPER CALIPER

CYLINDER B CYLINDER A CYLINDER B
Check the caliper cylinder for scoring, scratches or damage.
Measure the each caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT:
Caliper Cylinder A: 22.710 mm (0.8941 in)
Caliper Cylinder B: 25.460 mm (1.0023 in)
Check the caliper piston for scoring, scratches or damage.

CALIPER
Measure the each caliper piston O.D. PISTON A
SERVICE LIMIT:
Caliper Cylinder A: 25.31 mm (0.996 in)
Caliper Cylinder B: 22.56 mm (0.888 in)
CALIPER
PISTON B
CBS FRONT BRAKE ASSEMBLY
COLLAR PIN
BLEED VALVE DUST SEALS
CALIPER PISTON
CALIPER
PIN BOOT
CALIPER BODY
PAD RETAINER
BRACKET
PISTON SEALS
O-RING BRACKET PIN

HANGER PIN
PAD SPRING BRACKET PIN BOOT
14-15
BRAKE SYSTEM
ASSEMBLY
PISTON
Apply clean brake fluid to new piston and dust seals, and SEAL
install them into the seal grooves in the caliper cylinder. DUST SEAL
Apply clean brake fluid to the caliper pistons, and install

them into the caliper cylinders with the opening side toward
the pads
CALIPER
PISTONS
Install the pad spring onto the caliper body.

PAD RETAINER CALIPER BRACKET
Apply grease to the inner surface of brake caliper pin boots,
CALIPER
and install them into the caliper body.
BODY
Install the caliper bracket into the caliper body..
CALIPER
PIN BOOT
BRACKET
PIN BOOT PAD SPRING
INSTALLATION
Install the brake caliper to the right fork leg so that the disc
is positioned between the pads.
Install and tighten new brake caliper mounting bolts to the BOLTS
specified torque. BRAKE
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft) HOSE
Install the brake hose to the brake caliper with the oil bolt OIL BOLT
and new sealing washers.
Rest the hose joint onto the stoppers, and tighten the oil
bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft) SEALING WASHERS
Install the brake pads (page 14-7).
system (page 14-4).
NON CBS FRONT BRAKE

REMOVAL
Remove the brake pads (page 14-7). BRAKE
HOSE BOLTS
sealing washer.
Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts and brake caliper.
OIL BOLT SEALING
WASHERS
14-16
BRAKE SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY
CALIPER BODY CALIPER BRACKET
Remove the caliper bracket from the caliper body.
Remove the pad spring and bracket pin boot from the PAD SPRING
caliper body.
If the bracket pin boot is hard or deteriorated, replace it
with a new one.
BRACKET PIN BOOTS
Do not use high Place a shop towel over the caliper pistons.
pressure
Position the caliper body with the piston down, and apply
air or bring the
small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet to remove the
nozzle too close
caliper pistons.
to the inlet.
Be careful not to Push the dust seals and piston seals in, and lift them out.
damage the PISTON SEAL
Clean the seal grooves, caliper piston sliding surfaces and
piston
caliper pistons with clean brake fluid only.
sliding surface.
DUST SEAL
INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder for scoring, scratches or damage.
Measure the caliper cylinder I.D.
Check the caliper piston for scoring, scratches or damage.
Measure the caliper piston O.D.
14-17
BRAKE SYSTEM
FRONT BRAKE (NON CBS) ASSEMBLY
CALIPER PIN BOOTS

DUST SEAL
CALIPER
CALIPER PISTON
BRACKET
PISTON SEAL
BLEED VALVE
BRAKE CALIPER
CALIPER SLIDE PIN
BODY
STOPPER RING
PAD PIN
PAD SPRING
BRAKE PADS
INSTALLATION
DUST SEAL
Apply clean brake fluid to new piston and dust seals, and
PISTON SEAL
install them into the seal grooves in the caliper cylinder.
Apply clean brake fluid to the caliper pistons, and install
them into the caliper cylinders with the opening side toward
the pads. PISTON

BRACKET
Apply silicon grease to the inner surface of brake caliper
pin boots, and install them into the caliper body.
PAD SPRING
Install the caliper bracket into the caliper body.
PIN BOOTS
14-18
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install the brake caliper to the right fork leg so that the disc
is positioned between the pads.
Be careful not Install and tighten new brake caliper mounting bolts to the
to damage the specified torque.
pads. TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft) BRAKE
Install the brake hose to the brake caliper with the oil bolt HOSE BOLTS
and new sealing washers.
Rest the hose joint onto the stoppers, and tighten the oil
bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft) SEALING
OIL BOLT
Install the brake pads (page 14-7). WASHERS
system (page 14-4).
REAR BRAKE
REAR DISK BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT
Check the fluid Push the caliper pistons all the way in by pushing the
level in the caliper body inward to facilitate installation of new brake
master cylinder pads.
reservoir as
this operation
causes the fluid
level to rise.
Always replace Drive out the pad pin from the brake caliper.
the brake pads
Check the pad pin for abnormal wear or distortion, replace
in pairs to
them if necessary.
assure even
disc pressure.
REAR BRAKE
PAD PIN
Do not operate Remove the brake pads.

the front brake
lever after the
brake pads are
removed.
BRAKE PAD
14-19
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install new brake pads so that their ends rest on the caliper
bracket properly.
BRAKE PAD
Install new O-ring on to the pad pin groove and apply

silicone grease
O- RING
PAD PIN
Install the brake pad pin by pushing the pads against the
pad spring to align the pad pin holes in the pads and caliper.
Drive the pad pin into the caliper.
Tighten the rear brake pad pin to the specified torque.
TORQUE:17.2 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft)
REAR BRAKE
PAD PIN
REAR BRAKE DISC INSPECTION

Visually inspect the brake disc for damage or cracks.
Measure the brake disc thickness at several points.
SERVICE LIMIT : 3.5 mm (0.14 in)
Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less
than service limit.
Check the brake disc warpage using a dial indicator.
SERVICE LIMIT : 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
14-20
BRAKE SYSTEM
Check the wheel bearings for excessive play, if the warpage

exceeds the service limit.
Replace the brake disc if the wheel bearings are normal.
REAR MASTER CYLINDER (CBS ONLY) OIL BOLT

JOINT HOSE
REMOVAL
Remove the brake hose oil bolt and joint hose from rear
master cylinder.
MOUNTING BOLTS
Remove the split pin from the joint pin in the rear brake
pedal joint and remove the joint pin. SPLIT PIN
Remove the master cylinder mounting bolts (2 nos) and
remove the master cylinder.
Spilled fluid can damage painted, plastic, or rubber parts.

Place a rag over these parts whenever the system is
serviced.
JOINT PIN
REAR BRAKE PEDAL
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the boot and circlip from the master cylinder body.
CIRCLIP
BOOT
14-21
BRAKE SYSTEM
Remove the push rod assembly, master piston and spring.

Clean the inside of the cylinder with clean brake fluid. PUSH ROD ASSEMBLY
MASTER PISTON
SPRING
INSPECTION
Check the piston boot, primary cup and secondary cup
for fatigue or damage.
Check the master cylinder and piston for abnormal
scratches.
Measure the master cylinder I.D
SERVICE LIMIT:
CBS: 12.775 mm (0.5029 in)
Measure the master cylinder O.D
SERVICE LIMIT:
CBS: 12.645 mm (0.4978 in)
REAR MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

NOTE:
Replace the piston, spring and cup as a set.
SCREW
MASTER HOSE JOINT

CYLINDER CAP
O-RING
MASTER CYLINDER
DIAPHRAGM PLATE
DIAPHRAGM
SNAP RING
OIL CUP COMP.

SCREW/ WASHER BOOT
NUT
SPRING BRAKE ROD JOINT
MASTER PISTON
PUSH ROD
14-22
BRAKE SYSTEM
ASSEMBLY
• Keep the piston, cups, spring, snap ring and boot as a PUSH ROD ASSEMBLY
set, do not substitute individual.
Coat new piston cups and piston with clean brake fluid
before assembly. Install the spring to the master piston.
Install the spring and master piston assembly into the
master cylinder. MASTER PISTON
Apply silicone grease to the piston contact area of the
push rod.
SPRING
Install the push rod assembly into the master cylinder.
After installing Install the snap ring.

the snap ring,
Install the boot.
always rotate it CIRCLIP
in its groove to
be sure it is fully
seated.
BOOT
BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT

If the push rod is disassembled, adjust the push rod length LOCK NUT
so that the distance between the center of the master
cylinder lower mounting bolt hole and joint pin hole is
64 - 66 mm (2.51 - 2.59 in). After adjustment, tighten the
lock nut.
64 - 66 mm
(2.51 - 2.59 in)
INSTALLATION OIL BOLT

JOINT HOSE
Connect the mounting bolt (2 nos). Connect the hose joint

and rear brake hose oil bolt to the master cylinder and
tighten it to the specified torque.
TORQUE:
Oil Bolt - 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Mounting Bolt : 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.8 lbf·ft)
MOUNTING BOLTS
14-23
BRAKE SYSTEM
Install the brake rod joint on brake pedal by installing joint

pin and split pin.
Install right side step cover and right side cover. SPLIT PIN
JOINT PIN
REAR BRAKE PEDAL
REAR BRAKE CALIPER OIL BOLT
REMOVAL
Drain the brake fluid from the rear brake hydraulic system
(page 14-3).
Remove the brake pads by removing pad pin from the
caliper (page 14-7).
Remove the oil bolt, sealing washers and brake hose
eyelet joint.
Remove the rear wheel (page 13-4). SEALING
WASHERS
Remove the brake caliper. BRAKE CALIPER
DISASSEMBLY PAD SPRING

Remove the brake pad spring from the caliper body.
BRACKET
Remove the caliper bracket from the caliper body.

Remove the bracket pin boots.
BOOT
BOOT
BRACKET
CALIPER BODY
14-24
BRAKE SYSTEM
Do not bring Lightly apply compressed air to the fluid inlet to get the
the air nozzle piston out.
too close to
Place the shop rag under the caliper to cushion the piston
the inlet or the
when it is expelled.
pistons may be
forced out with Use the air in short spurts.
excessive force
that could cause
injury.
Be careful not Push the dust seal and piston seal in and lift them out.
to damage the
Clean the seal grooves, caliper piston and caliper piston
piston sliding PISTON SEAL
sliding surface with clean brake fluid.
surface.
DUST SEAL
INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder and pistons for scoring,
scratches or damage.
Measure the caliper cylinder I.D.
Measure the caliper piston O.D.
14-25
BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
DUST SEAL
CALIPER
PISTON
CALIPER
BRACKET
PISTON SEAL
BOOT BRAKE CALIPER
SLIDE PIN
CALIPER BODY
BOOT
O-RING
PAD PIN
PAD SPRING
BLEEDER BLEEDER CAP

PLUG PIN SCREW
Coat the new piston seal and dust seal with clean brake
fluid and install them in the seal grooves of the caliper.
Apply brake fluid to the caliper piston and install it into the
caliper cylinder with the opening towards the pads. PISTON SEAL
CALIPER
PISTON
DUST SEAL
If the caliper Apply silicone grease to the bracket pin boots and bracket
and bracket pin pins and install them.
boots are hard BOOT
Make sure the boots are securely seated into the pin
or deterio-rated,
grooves.
replace them
with new ones. Assemble the caliper bracket and caliper body.
BRACKET
BOOT
CALIPER BODY
14-26
BRAKE SYSTEM
Check the pad spring for damage and replace it if

necessary. PAD SPRING
BRACKET
INSTALLATION OIL BOLT

Lubricate the Install the rear brake caliper bracket assembly onto the
pad pin with swingarm by aligning the bracket slot with the boss on
silicone grease. the swingarm.
Install the brake pads (page 14-7).
Fill and bleed the rear brake hydraulic system.
SEALING
WASHERS
BRAKE CALIPER
BRAKE PEDAL RIGHT STEP

HOLDER
REMOVAL (CBS)
Remove the right side step holder by removing swing arm
pivot nut and right side step holder bolt.
NUT
BOLT
Unhook the rear brake pedal spring.

Unhook the rear brake light switch return spring. REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SPRING
Unhook the cotter pin from pin D joint and brake pad
holder shaft.
Remove the brake pedal.
COTTER PIN
COTTER PIN
PEDAL SPRING BRAKE PEDAL
14-27
BRAKE SYSTEM
INSTALLATION BRAKE PEDAL

Align the brake pedal with holder shaft HOLDER SHAFT
BRAKE PEDAL ALIGN
Hook the rear brake pedal spring.

Hook the rear brake light switch return spring. REAR BRAKE
Hook the cotter pin from pin D joint and brake pad holder LIGHT SPRING
shaft.
COTTER PIN
COTTER PIN
PEDAL SPRING BRAKE PEDAL
REMOVAL (STD) SWING ARM

SPRING SET
Remove the rear brake rod (page 13-4).
Remove spring set from swing arm.
BRAKE ROD
Remove the swing arm nut (1 no.), bolt (1 no.) and right
RIGHT STEP
step holder.
HOLDER
NUT
BOLT
14-28
BRAKE SYSTEM
Remove the split pin, washer and brake pedal from the
right step holder.
WASHER
BRAKE
PEDAL
RIGHT STEP HOLDER SPLIT PIN
Remove the split pin and joint pin to separate brake pedal
and brake rod. BRAKE PEDAL
JOINT PIN
SPLIT PIN BRAKE ROD
INSTALLATION
BRAKE PEDAL
Connect the brake rod to the brake pedal, then install the JOINT PIN
joint pin and new split pin.
SPLIT PIN BRAKE ROD
Apply grease to the right step holder shaft and insert brake
RIGHT STEP HOLDER Align
pedal by aligning it.
BRAKE PEDAL
14-29
BRAKE SYSTEM
Install the washer and new split pin.

WASHER
BRAKE
PEDAL
RIGHT STEP HOLDER SPLIT PIN
Route the brake light stop switch with spring and install the BRAKE LIGHT
switch spring to the brake pedal. NUT
STOP SWITCH
RIGHT STEP SWING

HOLDER ARM BOLT BOLT
Install the spring set on to the brake rod and swing arm.
SWING ARM
SPRING SET
Install the rear brake rod (page 13-9).
REAR DRUM BRAKE

INSPECTION
Remove the rear wheel and then remove the brake panel
(page 13-4).
Measure the rear brake drum I.D.
14-30
BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR DRUM BRAKE ASSEMBLY
SPRINGS
BRAKE PANEL
INDICATOR PLATE
BRAKE SHOES
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
FELT SEAL
BRAKE CAM
BRAKE ARM
BOLT
DISASSEMBLY
Expand the brake shoes and remove them from the brake
Do not apply
panel.
grease on brake
lining. Remove the shoe springs from the brake shoes.
• Always replace the brake shoes as a set.
• When the brake shoes are reused, mark all parts before SPRING
disassembly so they can be installed in their original
locations.
BRAKE SHOES
Remove the brake arm nut, bolt and brake arm.

NUT
BOLT
BRAKE ARM
14-31
BRAKE SYSTEM
Remove the indicator plate, dust seal and brake cam.
INDICATOR PLATE
BRAKE CAM FELT SEAL
Apply grease to the brake cam sliding surface.

BRAKE CAM
Install the brake cam to the brake panel.
BRAKE PANEL
Apply gear oil to a new dust seal, and install it onto the
brake panel. BRAKE PANEL
Align
Install the indicator plate onto the brake cam by aligning its
wide tooth with the wide groove on the brake cam.
INDICATOR PLATE
BRAKE CAM
FELT SEAL
Install the brake arm by aligning the punch marks of the

brake arm and brake cam.
NUT
Install the brake arm bolt and nut as shown, and tighten
the nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE:10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
BOLT
Align
BRAKE ARM
14-32
BRAKE SYSTEM
If the brake Apply grease to the anchor pin and brake cam shoe
BRAKE CAM
shoes are contacting area.
reused, the
Assemble the brake shoes and springs as shown.
shoes and
springs must be Install the shoe assembly onto the brake panel.
placed back in
Wipe any excess grease off the brake cam and anchor pin.
their original
locations. Install the brake panel and then install the rear wheel SPRING
(page 13-9).
ANCHOR PIN BRAKE SHOES
14-33
COMPONENT LOCATION
LIGHTING SWITCH
CDI UNIT
FUSE
ALTERNATOR BATTERY
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
FUSE (20A)
TO LIGHTING CIRCUIT
2P
R B G W W G R Y
ALTERNATOR
4P BLACK
W : White
Y : Yellow
BATTERY REGULATOR/ R : Red
RECTIFIER G : Green
B : Black
15-0
15. BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION 15-0 BATTERY CHARGING 15-5
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 15-0 INDICATION TABLE FOR MF BATTERY
CHARGER 15-7
SERVICE INFORMATION 15-1
CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION 15-7
TROUBLESHOOTING15-2
ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL 15-8
BATTERY15-3
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER15-9
BATTERY TESTING PROCEDURE 15-3
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• The battery gives off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation when charging.
• The battery contains sulfuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause severe burns. Wear protective clothing
and a face shield.
–– If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water.
–– If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and call a physician immediately.
• Electrolyte is poisonous.
–– If swallowed, drink large quantities of water or milk and call your local Poison Control Center or a physician immediately.
• Always turn “OFF” the ignition switch before disconnecting any electrical component.
• Some electrical components may be damaged if terminals or connectors are connected or disconnected by the ignition switch
is “ON”, and current is present.
• For extended storage, remove the battery, give it a full charge, and store it in a cool, dry space. For maximum service life,
charge the stored battery every two weeks.
• For a battery remaining in a stored motorcycle, disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery terminal.
• The battery can be damaged if overcharged or undercharged, or if left to discharge for a long period. These same conditions
contribute to shortening the “life span” of the battery. Even under normal use, the performance of the battery deteriorates after
2–3 years.
• Battery voltage may recover after battery charging, but under heavy load, battery voltage will drop quickly and eventually die
15
out. For this reason, the charging system is often suspected as the problem. Battery overcharge often results from problems in
the battery itself, which may appear to be an overcharging symptom. If one of the battery cells is shorted and battery voltage
does not increase, the regulator/rectifier supplies excess voltage to the battery. Under these conditions, the electrolyte level
goes down quickly.
• The battery will self-discharge when the motorcycle is not in use. For this reason, charge the battery every two weeks to prevent
salvation from occurring.
• When checking the charging system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 15-2).
• Refer to the alternator removal and disassembly (page 10-16).
BATTERY TESTING
Refer to instructions in the Operation Manual (page 15-3) for the recommended battery tester for details about battery testing.
The recommended battery tester puts a “load” on the battery so that the actual battery condition can be measured.
Recommended battery tester: FBT-50
15-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Capacity 12 V – 4 Ah Page 15–3
Current leakage 0.02mA max Page 15–7
Battery
Fully charged 12.5 - 13.0 V Page 15–3
Needs charging Below 12.4 V Page 15–3
Capacity 0.14kW / 5000 min-1(rpm) Page 15–8
Alternator
Charging coil resistance (200C / 680F) 0.2 – 1.0 Ω Page 15–8
TROUBLESHOOTING
BATTERY IS DAMAGED OR WEAK
1. BATTERY TEST
Remove the battery (page 15-3).
Check the battery condition using the recommended battery tester.
RECOMMENDED BATTERY TESTER: FBT-50 or equivalent
Is the battery in good condition?
NO – Faulty battery
YES – GO TO STEP 2.
2. CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST
Install the battery (page 15-3).
Check the battery current leakage (Leak test; page 15-7).
Is the current leakage below 0.02 mA?
NO – GO TO STEP 3.
3. CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST WITHOUT REGULATOR/RECTIFIER CONNECTOR
Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 4P connector, and recheck the battery current leakage.
Is the current leakage below 0.02 mA?
YES – Faulty regulator/rectifier
NO – • Shorted wire harness
• Faulty ignition switch
4. CHARGING VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Start the engine.
Measure the charging voltage (page 15-4).
Compare the measurements to the results of the following calculation.
STANDARD:
Measured BV < Measured CV < 13.5V-14.5V
• BV = Battery Voltage
• CV = Charging Voltage
Is the measured charging voltage within the standard voltage?
YES – Faulty battery
5. ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL INSPECTION
Check the alternator charging coil (page 15-8).
Is the alternator charging coil resistance within 0.2 – 1.0 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
NO – Faulty charging coil
6. REGULATOR/RECTIFIER SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check the voltage and resistance at the regulator/rectifier connector (page 15-9).
Are the results of the checked voltage and resistance correct?
NO – • Open circuit in related wire
• Loose or poor contacts of related terminal
• Shorted wire harness
15-2
BATTERY NEGATIVE POSITIVE

(-) CABLE (+) CABLE
VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Measure the battery voltage using a commercially available
FBT 50 battery tester.
VOLTAGE (20°C/68°F):
Fully charged: More than 12.4 V
Under charged: Below 12.4 V BATTERY
If the battery voltage is below 12.4 V, charge the battery.
STAY BOLT BATTERY BAND
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION NEGATIVE POSITIVE

Always turn the Remove the left side cover (page 2-3). (-) CABLE (+) CABLE
ignition switch
Disconnect the negative (–) cable by removing the bolt.
OFF before
removing the Disconnect the positive (+) cable by removing the bolt.
battery
Remove the bolt and open the battery band.
Remove the battery.
Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
Connect the positive (+) cable first and then the BATTERY
negative (–) cable.
STAY BOLT BATTERY BAND
BATTERY TESTING PROCEDURE

Check the battery pin number on front of the battery suface
and refer the table given below.
S.No. Battery PIN No. Ref. No.

1 ETZ 3 3
2 ETZ 4 4
3 ETZ 5 33
4 ETZ 7 5
Connect the tester probes to the battery terminal.

RED PROBE
Always connect red probe to positive and black probe to

negative terminal.
BLACK
PROBE
15-3
On connecting probes, the screen displays battery pin

number.
Use yellow arrow buttons to select the correct pin number.

According to the reference table given on page (15-3).
To check voltage press “V” button.

VOLTAGE (20°C/68°F):
Fully charged: More than 12.4 V
Under charged: Below 12.4 V
BATTERY LOAD TEST

Before doing the To load test the battery press “TEST” button.
load test battery
must be fully
charged Device will take approx 3 seconds to display result.
15-4
BATTERY TEST RESULT

RESULT – 1
Result indicator shows “Green light” with “OK”.
This means battery is healthy ready to be used.
RESULT – 2
Result indicator shows “Orange light” with “LOW”.
This means battery is weak.
Battery needs bench charging.
RESULT – 3
Result indicator shows “Red light” with “X”.
This means battery is dead.
Battery can not be used any further in the vehicle.
BATTERY CHARGING
Always charge batteries showing “LOW” with orange LED
on tester.
15-5
Avoid direct Connect charger red probe to positive and black to negative
contact of terminal.
battery with
ground, use
rubber mat or
wodden block
below the
battery.
Select the “New Battery” mode or “Used Battery” mode

by the selector switch based on condition of the battery
(New or Used) and switch on the charger.
After switching ON the Power, “MAINS LED” will glow
instantly.
Main LED will be followed by Yellow LED (For New Battery)

or Blue LED (For Used Battery) showing that the battery is
getting charged properly.
Green LED indicates, the battery is fully charged.

Again test the battery voltage (page 15-4).
Before testing, battery should be kept idle for atleast

30 minutes after charging.
15-6
INDICATION TABLE FOR MF BATTERY CHARGER
SYSTEM INSPECTION NEGATIVE (–)

CONNECTOR
CURRENT LEAKAGE INSPECTION (BATTERY)
Turn the ignition switch “OFF”, and disconnect the negative
(–) connector.
Connect the ammeter (+) probe to the wire harness
negative (–) connector and ammeter (–) probe to the battery
negative (–) connector.
With the ignition switch “OFF”, and check for current NEGATIVE (–)
leakage. CONNECTOR
(WIRE HARNESS)
• When measuring current using a tester, set it to a high AMMETER

range, and then bring the range down to an appropriate (+)TIVE
level. Current flow higher than the range selected may TERMINAL
blow out the fuse in the tester.
• While measuring current, do not turn the ignition switch
“ON”. A sudden surge of current may blow out the fuse
in the tester.
SPECIFIED CURRENT LEAKAGE: 0.02 mA max. (-)TIVE
TERMINAL
If current leakage exceeds the specified value, a short
circuit already happen.
Locate the short circuit by disconnecting connections one BATTERY
by one and measuring the current.
15-7
CHARGING VOLTAGE INSPECTION POSITIVE (+)

NEGATIVE (–)
Remove the left side cover (page 2-3). CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Reference Be sure the battery is in good condition before performing
(–) (+)
engine oil this test.
temperature:
600 – 650C Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature and
(1400 – 1450F). ensure engine idle rpm must be 1400+/-100
Stop the engine, and connect the multimeter between the
battery positive (+) and negative (–) connector.
• To prevent a short, make absolutely certain which are
the positive (+) and negative (–) connector.
• Do not disconnect the battery or any cable in the
Charging system without first turning the ignition switch
to “OFF”. Failure to follow this precaution can damage
the tester or electrical components.
Connect a tachometer according to the tachometer
manufacturer’s instructions.
Restart the engine.
With the headlight high beam in “ON” position, measure
the voltage on the multimeter when the engine runs at
5,000 min-1 (rpm).
STANDARD:
Measured BV < Measured CV < 13.5V-14.5V
• BV = Battery Voltage
• CV = Charging voltage
ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL

INSPECTION
Disconnect the alternator 2P (White) connector.
Measure the resistance between each wire terminal of the
alternator side connector.
2P (WHITE)
CONNECTOR
CONNECTION: White – Green

STANDARD: 0.2 – 1.0 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Replace the alternator stator if resistance is out of
specification.
Refer to the alternator stator replacement (page 10-16).
2P (WHITE)
CONNECTOR
15-8
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
SYSTEM INSPECTION
Remove the right side cover(page 2-3). (–)
Disconnect the regulator/rectifier connector, and check it
for loose contacts or corroded terminals.
If the charging voltage reading (page 15-4) is out of the (+)
specification, check the following at the wire harness side
connector:
Item Terminal Specification

Battery Red (+) and Battery voltage CONNECTOR
charging line ground (–) should register
Charging White and 0.2 - 1.0 Ω
coil line ground (200C/680F)
Ground line Green and Continuity
ground should exist
If all components of the charging system are normal, and

there are no loose connections at the regulator/rectifier
connector, replace the regulator/rectifier unit.
BOLT
Remove the connector.
Remove the bolt and regulator/rectifier from the frame.
Install the regulator/rectifier in the reverse order of removal.
REGULATOR/ CONNECTOR
RECTIFIER
15-9
IGNITION SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION COIL
CDI
FUSE
SPARK PLUG
BATTERY
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
16-0
16. IGNITION SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION 16-0 IGNITION TIMING 16-5
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 16-0 IGNITION COIL 16-6
SERVICE INFORMATION 16-1 CAPACITIVE DISCHARGE IGNITION 16-6
TROUBLESHOOTING16-2 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 16-7
IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION 16-3
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• The CDI may be damaged if dropped. Also if the connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive voltage may
damage the module. Always turn “OFF” the ignition switch before servicing.
• Use spark plug of the correct heat range. Using a spark plug with an incorrect heat range can damage the engine.
• When servicing the ignition system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting sequence on (page 16-2).
• The ignition timing cannot be adjusted since the CDI is factory preset.
• A faulty ignition system is often related to poor connections. Check those connections before proceeding.

Spark plug Standard CPR8EA-9 (NGK) Page 3–7
Spark plug gap 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (0.03 – 0.04 in) Page 3–7
Ignition coil peak voltage 100 V minimum Page 16–4
Ignition pulse generator peak voltage 0.7 V minimum Page 16–4
Ignition timing (“F” mark) 8° BTDC at 1400 rpm Page 16–5
Input voltage 5V Page 16–7
Throttle position sensor
Resistance (200C/680F) 4.0 –6.0 W Page 16–7
TORQUE VALUES
THREAD TORQUE
Timing hole cap 90084 – MN8 – 010 1 14 10 (1.0, 7) Page 16–5
Throttle position sensor screw 16080 – KTN – 901 1 5 3.4 (0.4, 2.5) Page 16–8
16
TOOL
Peak voltage adapter
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter

(impedance 10 M /DCV minimum) or imrie diagnostic
tester (model 625)
16-1
IGNITION SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Inspect the following before diagnosing the system.
–– Faulty spark plug
–– Loose spark plug cap or spark plug wire connections
–– Water got into the spark plug cap (Leaking the ignition coil secondary voltage)
No spark at spark plug
Unusual condition Probable cause (check in numerical order)

Low peak voltage 1. The multimeter impedance is too low; below 10 MΩ/DCV.
2. Cranking speed is too slow.
3. The sampling time of the tester and measured pulse were not
synchronized. (System is normal if measured voltage is over the standard
voltage at least once.)
4. Poorly connected connectors or an open circuit in the ignition system.
5. Faulty ignition coil.
6. Faulty capacitive discharge ignition (CDI) (in case when No.1-5 are
normal).
No peak voltage 1. Incorrect peak voltage adapter connections.
Ignition coil 2. Battery is undercharged.
primary voltage 3. Faulty ignition switch.
4. Loose or poorly connected CDI connectors.
5. Open circuit or poor connection in the Red/Black wire of the CDI.
6. Open circuit or poor connection in the green wire of the CDI.
7. Faulty peak voltage adapter.
8. Faulty ignition pulse generator. (Measure the peak voltage.)
9. Faulty CDI (in case when above No.1 – 8 are normal).
Peak voltage is normal. 1. Faulty spark plug or leaking ignition coil but no spark jumps at the plug
but no spark jumps at the plug. secondary current.
2. Faulty ignition coil.
Low peak voltage 1. The multimeter impedance is too low; generator below 10 MΩ/DCV.
2. Cranking speed is too slow.
3. The sampling time of the tester and measured pulse were not
synchronized. (System is normal if measured voltage is over the standard
Ignition pulse voltage at least once.)
generator 4. Faulty ignition pulse generator (in case when above No.1 – 3 are
normal).
No peak voltage 1. Faulty peak voltage adapter.
2. Faulty ignition pulse generator.
16-2
IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION

• If there is no spark at the plug, check all connections
for loose or poor contact before measuring the peak
voltage.
• Use a recommended digital multimeter or commercially
available digital multimeter with an impedance of 10
MΩ/DCV. minimum.
• The display value differs depending upon the internal
impedance of the multimeter.
• If using the Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625), follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Connect the peak voltage adaptor to the digital multimeter,
or use the Imrie diagnostic tester.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or DIGITAL MULTIMETER
Peak voltage adaptor: 07HG-J-0020100
With commercially available digital multimeter
(Impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
PEAK VOLTAGE
ADAPTER
IGNITION COIL PRIMARY PEAK

VOLTAGE
• Check all system connections before this inspection.
Poor connected connectors can cause incorrect
readings.
• If the system is disconnected, incorrect peak voltage
might be measured.
• Check the cylinder compression, and check that the
spark plug is installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Shift the transmission into neutral and disconnect the spark
plug cap from the spark plug.
KNOWN GOOD SPARK PLUG
Connect a known-good spark plug to the spark plug cap,
and ground it to the cylinder head as done in a spark test.
16-3
IGNITION SYSTEM
Remove the right side cover (page 2-3). WIRE CONNECTOR IGNITION COIL
With the ignition coil primary wire connected, connect the

peak voltage tester or adaptor probes to the ignition coil
primary terminal and body ground.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor: 07HGJ-0020100
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
CONNECTION: Black/Yellow (+) – Body ground (–)
Avoid touching Turn the ignition switch “ON”.
the spark plug
Crank the engine with the starter switch, and read ignition
or tester probes
coil primary peak voltage.
to prevent
electric shock. PEAK VOLTAGE: 100 V minimum
IGNITION COIL
If the peak voltage is lower than specified value, follow the
checks described in the troubleshooting chart (page 16-2).
PEAK VOLTAGE
ADAPTER
IGNITION PULSE GENERATOR PEAK

VOLTAGE
• Check the cylinder compression, and make sure the
spark plug is installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Remove the fuel tank (page 2-3).
Disconnect the CDI 4P White connector.
Connect the peak voltage tester or adaptor probes to the
ignition pulse generator terminals (Blue/Yellow) of the 4P
connector.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor 07HGJ-0020100
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
CONNECTION:
Blue/Yellow wire terminal (+) – Body Ground (–)
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch “ON”.
Crank the engine with the self starter, and read ignition
pulse generator peak voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 0.7 V minimum
If the peak voltage measured at the CDI 4P connector is
abnormal, measure the peak voltage at the ignition pulse
generator connector.
16-4
IGNITION SYSTEM

Disconnect the ignition pulse generator connector. (Blue/ IGNITION COIL
Yellow) and connect the tester or adaptor probes to the
ignition pulse generator side connector and body ground.
In the same manner as at the CDI connector, measure the
peak voltage and compare it to the voltage measured at
the CDI connector.
• If the peak voltage measured at the CDI is abnormal
and the one measured at the ignition pulse generator is
normal, the wire harness has an open or short circuit,
or loose connection.
PEAK VOLTAGE
• If both peak voltages are abnormal, follow the checks ADAPTER
described in the troubleshooting chart (page 16-2).
Ignition pulse generator replacement (page 10-16).
IGNITION TIMING TIMING HOLE CAP

Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
Stop the engine, and remove the timing hole cap.
Read the Connect a timing light to the spark plug wire.

instructions for TIMING LIGHT
Start the engine and let it idle.
timing light
operation. IDLE SPEED:1,400 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
The ignition timing is correct if the “F” mark on the flywheel

INDEX NOTCH
aligns with the index notch in the left crankcase cover.
16-5
IGNITION SYSTEM
Coat a new O-ring with engine oil and install it onto the
timing hole cap. TIMING HOLE CAP
Install and tighten the timing hole cap to the specified
torque.
TORQUE:10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) CRANCKCASE CAP
O-RING
IGNITION COIL WIRE CONNECTOR IGNITION COIL
Disconnect the spark plug cap from the spark plug.
Disconnect the wire connector from the ignition coil.
Remove the bolts and ignition coil.
BOLTS
CDI (CAPACITIVE DISCHARGE IGNITION)

SYSTEM INSPECTION
Remove the fuel tank. (page 2-3).
Disconnect the CDI 6P White connector.
Check the following at the wire harness side connector:
Item Terminal Specification

Battery Red/Black (+) and Battery voltage CDI 6P CONNECTOR
line body ground (-) should register
Ground Green and body Continuity
line ground should exist
6P CONNECTOR CDI
Disconnect the CDI 4P and 6P White connector.
Remove the CDI from the rubber bracket.
RUBBER
BRACKET
4P CONNECTOR
16-6
IGNITION SYSTEM
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR THROTTLE POSITION

SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
INSPECTION
INPUT VOLTAGE
Remove the rubber boot.
Disconnect the throttle position sensor 3P Grey connector
from carburetor assembly.
Check the following at the wiring harness side connector: THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR RUBBER BOOT
CONNECTION: Yellow/Red (+) – Blue/Green (–)
STANDARD: 4.75 – 5.25 V
If the measurement is out of specification, check the
following:
–– Loose connection of the CDI 4P connector
–– Open circuit in wire harness
OPERATION INSPECTION
Connect the throttle position sensor 3P Grey connector.
Disconnect the CDI 4P connector.
Check that the resistance at the CDI 4P White connector
terminals while operating the throttle grip.
ICM 4P CONNECTOR
CONNECTION: Yellow/Red – Yellow/Blue
RESISTANCE: 4.0 – 6.0 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Item Resistance
Full close to full open Decreases
Full open to full close Increases
If the resistance at the CDI 4P White connector is abnormal,

measure the resistance at throttle position sensor 3P Grey
connector.
Disconnect the TP sensor 3P Grey connector from the

carburetor.
Check that the resistance at TP sensor 3P Grey connector
terminals while operating the throttle grip.
CONNECTION: Yellow/Red (A) – Yellow/Blue (B)
A
STANDARD: 4.0 – 6.0 Ω (200C/680F)
Item Resistance
Full close to full open Decreases
Full open to full close Increases
• If the resistance at throttle position sensor 3P Grey

connector is normal, the wire harness has an open
circuit or loose connection.
B
• If both measured resistance are abnormal, replace TP THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
sensor (page 16-8). 3P CONNECTOR
16-7
IGNITION SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION SCREW
Remove the rubber boot.
Disconnect the throttle position sensor 3P Grey connector.
Remove the carburetor (page 5-6).
Remove the screw and throttle position sensor.
THROTTLE POSITION
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
SENSOR RUBBER BOOT 3P CONNECTOR
Install the throttle position sensor while aligning the groove

THROTTLE POSITION
of the sensor with the flat of the shaft as shown.
SENSOR
Align
Rotate the throttle position sensor and align the hole in the
THROTTLE SCREW
sensor with the screw hole in the carburetor.
POSITION
Install and tighten the screw. SENSOR
Connect the throttle position sensor 3P Grey connectors.
Check the throttle operation (page 3-5)
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
INITIALIZING PROCEDURE
• After replacing the CDI or throttle position sensor,
perform the initializing procedure.
• If tachometer needle indicate the 10,000 r/min for 5
seconds in any step of the initializing procedure, turn
the ignition switch “OFF” and repeat the procedures
from the step1.
• The initializing procedure will fail automatically, if any
step is not completed within 8 seconds.
If so, turn the ignition switch “OFF” and repeat the
procedure from the step1.
16-8
IGNITION SYSTEM
Connect the Remove the left side cover (page 2-3).

positive terminal
first and then
the negative Disconnect the ignition pulse generator wire connector
terminal. (page 10-16).
Connect the positive terminal first and then the negative
terminal.
Connect the battery to the ignition pulse generator wire
connector and body ground.
CONNECTION:
Blue/Yellow wire terminal (+)
Body ground (-)
Complete each Turn the ignition switch “ON”, the tachometer should
1000r/min TACHOMETER
step within 8 indicate the 1,000 r/min.
seconds.
IGNITION SWITCH
Complete each Turn the throttle grip to the fully opened position, the
step within 8 tachometer should indicate the 2,000 r/min.
seconds. TACHOMETER
THROTTLE 2000 r/min

GRIP
Complete each Turn the throttle grip to the fully closed position, the
seconds. TACHOMETER
THROTTLE 3000 r/min

GRIP
16-9
IGNITION SYSTEM
Complete each Turn the throttle grip to the fully opened position, the
seconds. TACHOMETER
THROTTLE 4000 r/min

GRIP
Complete each Turn the throttle grip to the fully closed position, the
seconds. TACHOMETER
When the tachometer indicates soon about 7,000 r/min,
the initializing procedure is successful.
5000 r/min
THROTTLE
GRIP
16-10
MEMO
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
COMPONENT LOCATION
COMBINATION METER WINKER RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH
HEADLIGHT FRONT BRAKE
SWITCH LIGHT SWITCH
FUEL LEVEL
SENSOR
PASSING
RELAY
HORN
SPARK PLUG
NEUTRAL SWITCH
REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
17-0
17. LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
COMPONENT LOCATION 17-0 COMBINATION SWITCH 17-10
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 17-0 HANDLEBAR SWITCHES 17-11
SERVICE INFORMATION 17-1 LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH 17-11
HEADLIGHT17-2 BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH 17-12
BRAKE /TAIL LIGHT 17-3 NEUTRAL SWITCH 17-12
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS 17-4 FUEL GAUGE/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 17-14
COMBINATION METER 17-5 HORN17-16
SPEEDOMETER VS SENSOR 17-7 PASSING RELAY 17-16
TACHOMETER17-8 TURN SIGNAL RELAY 17-17
DIGITAL METER RESET PROCEDURE 17-9 FUSE BOX 17-18
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• A halogen headlight bulb becomes very hot while the headlight is “ON”, and remains hot for a while after it is turned “OFF”.
Be sure to let it cool down before servicing.
• Note the following when replacing the halogen headlight bulb.
–– Wear clean gloves by replacing the bulb. Do not put finger prints on the headlight bulb, as they may create hot spots on
the bulb and cause it to fail.
–– If you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol to prevent its early failure.
–– Be sure to install the dust cover after replacing the bulb.
• Keep all flammable materials away from the electric heating element. Wear protective clothing, insulated gloves and eye
protection.
• Check the battery condition before performing any inspection that requires proper battery voltage.
• A continuity test can be made with the switches installed on the motorcycle.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
L = Blue G = Green Lg = Light green R = Red
B = Black Gr = Gray O = Orange W = White
Br = Brown Sb = Sky blue P = Pink Y = Yellow
SPECIFICATIONS
Headlight (Hi/low beam) 12V – 35/35W –
Position light 12V - 5W X 2 – 17
Brake/tail light (LED) 2 W (LED)*9 –
Turn signal light 12V - 10W x 4 –
Bulb Instrument light 140 mcd LED*6 –
Turn signal indicator 56 mcd LED –
High-beam indicator 28 mcd LED –
Tail light 0.3 W (LED)*9 –
Neutral indicator 56 mcd LED –
Main 20A –
Fuse
Sub 15A & 5A –
Full 6–9W Page 17–14
Fuel level sensor
Empty 90 – 96 W Page 17–14
TORQUE VALUES
Fuel level sensor mounting nut 9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 7 lbf.ft) Page 17-16
17-1
HEADLIGHT
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove the front cowl (page 2-2).
Disconnect the headlight connector.
CONNECTOR
Avoid touching Remove the dust cover.

halogen MARK
Remove the bulb retainer.
headlight bulb. DUST COVER
Finger prints Remove the headlight bulb.
can create hot
Install the new bulb while aligning the tabs of the bulb with
spots that cause
the slots of the headlight unit.
a bulb to break.
Hook the bulb retainer into the headlight unit groove.
Install the dust cover with the “ ▲ “ mark facing up.
BULB
RETAINER
Connect the headlight connector.

Install the front cowl (page 2-2).
CONNECTOR
17-2
HEADLIGHT UNIT
Remove the headlight adjusting bolt.
ADJUSTING BOLT

CLIPS
Disconnect the headlight connector.
Remove the clips and headlight unit.
Adjust the headlight beam vertically (page 3-21)
CONNECTOR
BRAKE/TAIL LIGHT BRAKE/TAIL LIGHT
LED UNIT REPLACEMENT

Remove the LED brake/tail light by following the
disassembly procedure as given in chapter 2 (page 2-5).
Replace the LED tail light assy. with a new one under
warranty (As per conditions).
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT BULB

Remove the number plate light lens by removing the
BULB
screws (2 nos.).
Slightly press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.
Replace the bulb.
NUMBER PLATE LENS SCREWS
17-3
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS

BULB REPLACEMENT BULB
Remove the screw and remove signal light lens.

Push the bulb in turn it counterclockwise and remove it.
Replace the bulb with a new one.
LENS
SCREW
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION NUT STAY

FRONT CONNECTOR
Disconnect the turn signal light connector.
Route the wires
properly Remove the turn signal mounting nut and stay.
(page 1-14). Remove the turn signal light assy.
Install the turn signal light by aligning the cut-out of the turn
signal light with cut-out washer.
NUT STAY
CONNECTOR
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

Remove the rear cowl set (page 2-7).
Disconnect the turn signal light connectors.
Remove the nuts (2 nos) and remove signal lights.
Route the wires Install the turn signal light by aligning the cut-out of the turn
properly signal light with cut-out washer.
(page 1-14).
NUTS
CUTOUT WASHER Align
17-4
COMBINATION METER
POWER/GROUND LINE INSPECTION
If any indication in the combination meter is abnormal,
check the following item.
Remove the dust cover.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
Check the following at the wire harness side connector
terminals of the combination meter. 16P CONNECTOR
DUST COVER
Power input line

16P CONNECTOR
Measure the voltage between the Black wire terminal (+)
and body ground (–). BLACK
There should be battery voltage with the combination
switch ON.
If there is no voltage, check the fuse (15 Amp) and open
circuit in Black wire.
Back-up voltage line

16P CONNECTOR
Measure the voltage between the Red/white wire terminal
(+) and body ground (–).
There should be battery voltage at all times. RED/ WHITE
If there is no voltage, check the fuse (10 Amp) and open
circuit in Red / White wire.
Ground line
Measure the continuity between the Green wire terminal
and body ground.
GREEN
If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Green wire.
17-5
REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION
Remove front cowl (page 2-2).
Disconnect the combination meter Grey 16P connector
assembly.
16P CONNECTOR
DUST COVER
Remove the screws (3 nos.) and washers.

Remove the combination meter assembly from front cowl
stay.
SCREWS/WASHERS
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the screws (6 nos.), meter lower cover and upper
cover.
Check that the indicators function properly.

If they do not function, perform the power and ground line
inspection combination meter.
SCREWS
COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
UPPER CASE UNDER CASE
GASKET SPEEDOMETER SCREWS
17-6
SPEEDOMETER VS SENSOR
SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check the combination meter functions properly.
If they do not function, perform the power and ground line
inspection of the combination meter (page 17-5).
Check the connection/connector for correct fitment.
16P CONNECTOR
DUST COVER
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 3 WIRE CONNECTOR

Disconnect the VS sensor 3 connectors.
Turn the ignition switch to ON and measure the voltage HARNESS SIDE
between the Black (+) and Green (–) wire terminals at the
harness side.
CONNECTION: Black (+) – Green (–)
STANDARD: 9 ± 0.5 V
If there is no voltage, check for open circuit in related wires.
If voltage is as per specification, check the VS sensor as

VS SENSOR SIDE
follows.
Measure the voltage between the White/Blue (+) and
Green(–) wire terminals of the sensor side connector.
Slowly turn the rear wheel by hand.
There should be 0 to 5 V pulse voltage.
If pulse voltage does not appear, replace the VS sensor.
17-7
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION O-RING
Disconnect the VS sensor 3 connectors (page 17-7)..
Remove the VS sensor mounting bolt (1 nos.).
Remove the VS sensor assy from the crankcase.
Installation is in the reverse order of the removal.
VS SENSOR
TACHOMETER
SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check for loose or poor contact terminals at the combination
meter 16P (Gray).
Turn the combination switch ON, check that the tachometer
needle moves to full scale and then returns to zero.
If the meter does not show initial function, check the
combination meter power input line (page 17-5).
Remove the front cowl (page 2-2) with combination meter
16P (Gray) connector connected.
Connect the peak voltage adaptor to the combination meter

terminal and ground.
TOOL:
Peak voltage adapter 07HGJ-0020100
Connection: Yellow/green (+) – Ground (–)
Start the engine and measure the tachometer input peak
voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 10.5 V minimum
If the peak voltage is normal, replace the combination meter PEAK VOLTAGE
assembly (page 17-5). ADAPTOR
If the measured value is below 10.5 V, replace the CDI.

If the value is 0 V, check for continuity between the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector and CDI 4P (Red)
connector Yellow/green terminals.
TOOL:
Test probe 07ZAJ-RDJA110
If there is no continuity, check the wire harness and
combination meter.
If there is continuity, replace the combination meter
(page 17-5).
17-8
DIGITAL METER RESET SELECT RESET

PROCEDURE
TRIPMETER
To reset the tripmeter proceed as follows:
Press the select button to select tripmeter.
–– Reset button
–– Select button
To reset the tripmeter, press and hold the reset button

for more than 3 seconds when the display is in the “Trip”.
DIGITAL CLOCK
SELECT RESET
The digital clock will show hours and minutes up to 11:59 .
To adjust the time, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the combination switch ON.
2. Press and hold the Select button and Reset button for
more than 3 seconds simultaneously. The clock will be
set in the adjust mode with the hour flashing.
–– Reset button
–– Select button
3. To set the hour, press the reset button until the desired
hour is displayed.
–– Quick setting - press and hold the reset button until
the desired hour appears.
4. Press the select button when the display reaches the
desired hour.
5. After pressing the select button minute digit will start
flashing
17-9
6. To set the minute, press the reset button until the desired
minute appears.
–– Quick setting - press and hold the reset button until
the desired minute appears.
7. Press the select button when the display reaches the
desired minute.
The display will stop flashing.
If the combination switch is turned off or no operation is
performed for 30 seconds during the time adjustment mode,
the clock will be reset.
The clock will be reset at 1:00 hrs if the battery is
disconnected.
COMBINATION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH

3P CONNECTORS
INSPECTION
Disconnect the combination switch 3P White connectors.
Check for continuity between the combination switch
connector terminal in each switch position according to
the table.
BAT1 BAT2
LOCK
OFF
ON
COLOR R R/B
Remove the combination meter (page 17-6).
Remove the top bridge (page 12-21).
–– combination switch mounting screws
–– combination switch
SCREWS
IGNITION
SWITCH
Apply a locking agent to the combination switch mounting

screws threads before installing.
–– combination switch
–– combination switch mounting screws.
Install the top bridge (page 12-26).
Install the combination meter (page 17-6) in reverse order.
Install the front cowl (page 2-2).
SCREWS
IGNITION
SWITCH
17-10
HANDLEBAR SWITCHES 3P (BLACK)

CONNECTORS
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
Disconnect the handlebar switches 9P White and 3P Black
from left handlebar.
Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch
position according to the table.
6P (WHITE)
CONNECTORS
DIMMER SWITCH TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

PASSING SWITCH
HL LO HI W R L
LO R
(N) (N)
HI L
COLOR L/W W L/R COLOR GR SB O
LIGHTING
SWITCH
TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
DIMMER
HORN SWITCH
PASSING SWITCH HORN SWITCH 3P (BLACK)

CONNECTORS
BAT HI BAT HO
FREE FREE
PUSH PUSH
COLOR B L/B COLOR B LG
LIGHTING SW
HL C1 TL C2
OFF
(N)
TL
(N)
HL
17-11
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH FRONT BRAKE

LIGHTING SWITCH
FRONT
Disconnect the front brake light switch connectors.
There should be continuity with the brake lever squeezed,
and there should be no continuity when the brake lever is
released.
REAR
Disconnect the rear brake light switch connectors, and
check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity with the brake pedal squeezed,
and there should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
Continuity : Green/ Yellow - Black
2P CONNECTOR
NEUTRAL SWITCH
INSPECTION
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
NEUTRAL SWITCH WIRE

CONNECTORS
Shift the gear position into the neutral.

NEUTRAL SWITCH WIRE
Check for continuity between the light green/red terminal CONNECTORS
and body ground.
There should be continuity with the transmission is in
neutral, and no continuity when the transmission is into
gear.
17-12
REMOVAL
Remove the left crankcase rear cover (page 11-4).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
Remove the neutral switch mounting bolts (2 nos.).
BOLTS
NEUTRAL SWITCH
Remove the neutral switch and O-ring. O-RING
NEUTRAL SWITCH
Remove the drive piece and spring.
DRIVE PIECE SPRING
INSTALLATION
Check the drive piece and spring for wear or damage,
replace them if necessary.
• Bending the drive piece by forcing or crushing the
contact point will cause poor electricity connection.
Install the spring and drive piece.
DRIVE PIECE SPRING
17-13
Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring, and install it to the O-RING
neutral switch.
NEUTRAL SWITCH
Carrying out as Install the neutral switch.

shown that the
Install the neutral switch mounting bolts (2 nos.) and
direction of the
tighten them.
neutral switch
tab. Route the neutral switch wire to the left crankcase cover
grooves properly.
Install the left crankcase rear cover (page 11-17).
BOLTS
Connect the neutral switch connector (page 17-13).
NEUTRAL SWITCH
FUEL GAUGE/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the needle does not move:
1. Fuel Level Sensor Inspection
Disconnect the fuel level sensor 3P (White) connector.
Measure the resistance at the fuel level sensor terminals
(Yellow/ White - Green).
STANDARD: 4 – 100 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within 4 – 100 Ω (20°C/68°F)? 2P CONNECTOR
NO – Inspect the fuel level sensor (page 17-14) closed.
YES – STEP 2.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION

Remove the fuel level sensor as described below.
Connect the ohmmeter to the fuel level sensor terminals.
Inspect the resistance of the float at the top and bottom
positions.
FULL EMPTY
Resistance (20 C/68 F)
0 0
6-9 Ω 90-96 Ω
FUEL EMPTY
17-14
2. Fuel Level Sensor Output Line Inspection

Check the continuity between the fuel level sensor
2P (White) connector terminal and wire harness side of
the combination meter.
CONNECTION:
Yellow/White – Yellow/White
Green – Green
Is there continuity?
NO – Open circuit in Yellow/White or Green wire
YES – Check the Speedometer. 2P CONNECTOR
NUTS
Drain the fuel from the fuel tank into the approved gasoline
container.
Remove the nuts (4 nos.).
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Remove the fuel level sensor unit and O-ring.

FUEL LEVEL
SENSOR UNIT FLOAT
O-RING
Be careful not Install a new O-ring to the fuel tank.

to damage the FUEL LEVEL
Install the fuel level sensor unit into the fuel tank. SENSOR UNIT FLOAT
float arm.
O-RING
17-15
Install the nuts, then tighten them.

TORQUE: 9 N.m (0.9 kgf.m, 7 Ibf.ft) NUTS
Install the fuel tank (page 2-3).
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
HORN
ADJUSTING SCREW
INSPECTION
Disconnect the wire connectors from the horn.
Connect the battery voltage to the horn terminals.
The horn is normal if it sounds when the battery voltage is
connected across the horn terminals.
If horn sound is abnormal adjust the sound with adjusting
screw
WIRE CONNECTORS
Disconnect the wire connectors from the horn.
Remove the bolt and horn.
HORN
BOLT
PASSING RELAY PASSING RELAY 5P CONNECTOR

Disconnect the passing relay 5P connector from the relay.
Remove the passing relay from the bracket.
17-16
INSPECTION D A
C
Connect the ohmmeter to the passing relay connector
E
terminals.
CONNECTION: A–D L B
A–E G
Connect the battery to the passing relay connector L/B
terminals.
B
CONNECTION: B–C
L/R
Refer to the chart, and check for continuity between the
terminals when 12V battery is connected.
A–D A–E
12V battery is Continuity No Continuity
connected
12V battery is No Continuity Continuity
not connected
TURN SIGNAL RELAY
TURN SIGNAL RELAY 2P CONNECTOR
INSPECTION
1. Recommended Inspection
–– Battery condition
–– Burned out bulb or non - specified wattage
–– Burned fuse
–– Combination and turn signal switches function
–– Loose connector
Are the above items in good condition?
NO – Replace or repair the malfunction part(s)
YES – GO TO STEP 2. JUMPER WIRE
2. Turn Signal Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the turn signal relay 2P White connector from
the turn signal relay.
Short the Black and Gray terminals of the turn signal relay
connector with a jumper wire.
Start the engine and check the turn signal light by turning
the switch “ON”.
TURN SIGNAL RELAY
Is the light come on?
2P CONNECTOR
YES – • Faulty turn signal relay
• Poor connection of the connector
NO – Open circuit in Black or Gray wires TURN SIGNAL RELAY
Disconnect the turn signal relay 2P White connector from
the relay.
Remove the turn signal relay from the bracket.
TURN SIGNAL RELAY

2P CONNECTOR
17-17
FUSE BOX FUSE BOX

REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION
Unhook the fuse box by pulling the fuse box lock outside
from the battery box.
Don’t pull the fuse box lock with excessive force, it may
damage the lock permanently.

BATTERY BOX
17-18
MEMO
ELECTRIC STARTER SYSTEM
ELECTRIC STARTER COMPONENT
IGNITION SWITCH
STARTER SWITCH
HANDLEBAR
SWITCH
STARTER
RELAY
CLUTCH
SWITCH
NEUTRAL
DIODE
STARTER
MOTOR
NEUTRAL SWITCH
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
18-0
18. ELECTRIC STARTER SYSTEM
ELECTRIC STARTER COMPONENT 18-0 STARTER RELAY SWITCH 18-3
ELECTRIC STARTER DIAGRAM 18-0 NEUTRAL DIODE 18-4
SERVICE INFORMATION 18-1 CLUTCH SWITCH 18-5
TROUBLE SHOOTING 18-1 RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH 18-5
SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
If the current is kept flowing through the starter motor to turn it while the engine is not cranking over, the starter motor may be
damaged.
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF before servicing the starter motor. The motor could suddenly start, causing serious injury.
• The starter motor can be serviced with the engine in the frame.
• When checking the starter system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting (page 18-1).
• A weak battery may be unable to turn the starter motor quickly enough, or supply adequate ignition current.
• Refer to the following:
–– Starter clutch (page 10-6)
–– Combination switch (page 17-10)
–– Starter switch (page 18-3)
–– Neutral switch (page 17-12)
–– Clutch switch (page 18-5)
TROUBLESHOOTING
BATTERY IS DAMAGED OR WEAK
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse or sub fuse.
Is the fuse blown?
YES – Replace the fuse.
2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Is the battery in good condition and fully charged?
NO – Change or replace the battery
3. Battery cable Inspection
Check the battery cables for loose or poorly connected terminal, and for an open circuit.
Is the battery cable in good condition?
NO – • Loose or poorly connected battery cables. 18
• Open circuit in the battery cable.
4. Starter Motor Cable Inspection
Check the starter motor cable for loose or poorly connected terminal, and for an open circuit.
Is the starter motor cable in good condition?
NO – • Loose or poorly connected starter motor cable.
– • Open circuit in the starter motor cable.
5. Starter Relay Switch Operation Inspection
Check the operation of the starter relay switch (page 18-3)
Does the starter relay switch click?
18-1
6. Starter Motor Inspection

Connect the starter motor terminal to the battery positive terminal directly.
(A large amount of current flows, so do not use a thin wire.)
Does the starter motor turn?
7. Relay Coil Ground Line Inspection
Check the ground line of the starter relay switch (page 18-3).
Is the ground line normal?
NO – • Faulty neutral switch (page 17-12)
• Faulty neutral diode (page 18-4)
• Faulty clutch switch (page 18-5)
• Loose or poor contact of the related connector terminal.
• Open circuit in the wire harness.
8. Relay Coil Power Input Line Inspection
Check the power input line of the starter relay switch (page 18-3).
Is the power input line normal?
NO – • Faulty ignition switch (page 17-10).
• Faulty starter switch (page 18-3).
• Loose or poor contact of the related connector terminal.
• Open circuit in the wire harness.
9. Starter Relay Switch Inspection
Check the function of the starter relay switch (page 18-3).
Does the starter relay switch function properly ?
YES – Faulty starter relay switch.
NO – Loose or poor contact of the starter relay switch connector.
Starter motor turns engine slowly
• Low battery voltage
• Poorly connected battery cable
• Poorly connected starter motor cable
• Faulty starter clutch
• Poorly connected ground cable terminal
Starter motor turns, but engine does not turn
• Starter motor is running backwards
• – Case assembled improperly
– Terminals connected improperly
• Faulty starter clutch
• Damaged or faulty starter gear train
Starter relay switch clicks, but engine does not turn over
• Crankshaft does not turn due to engine problems
18-2
STARTER RELAY SWITCH NEGATIVE TERMINAL

Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery.
Pull the starter relay from the battery tray.
STARTER RELAY
SWITCH
Disconnect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector.

SOCKET BOLTS
Remove the socket bolts, battery cable and starter motor
cable from the starter relay switch.
Remove the starter relay switch from the stay.
STARTER RELAY
SWITCH
OPERATION INSPECTION
NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to “ON’ and push the starter switch.
The coil is normal if the starter relay switch clicks.
If you don’t hear the switch click, inspect the relay switch
circuit.
STARTER RELAY
SWITCH
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
4P (RED) CONNECTOR
GROUND LINE
Turn the ignition switch to “OFF”.
Disconnect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector.
Check for continuity between the Green/Red wire terminal
of the wire harness side connector and ground.
If there is continuity when the transmission is in neutral
or when the clutch lever is squeezed, the ground circuit
is normal.
18-3
POWER INPUT LINE

4P (RED) CONNECTOR
Connect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector.
Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
Measure the voltage between the yellow/Red wire terminal
(+) and ground (–).
If the battery voltage appears only when the starter switch
is pushed, the circuit is normal.
FUNCTION INSPECTION
Remove the starter relay switch (page 18-3).
Connect an ohmmeter to the starter relay switch cable
terminals.
Connect the fully charged 12V battery to the starter relay
switch connector terminals (A and B terminals).
There should be continuity between the cable terminals
while the battery is connected and no continuity when the
battery is disconnected.
NEUTRAL DIODE NEUTRAL DIODE

INSPECTION
Release the neutral diode.
Check for continuity between the diode terminals.

When there is continuity, a small resistance value will
register.
If there is continuity in one direction, the diode is normal.
NEUTRAL DIODE
18-4
CLUTCH SWITCH CLUTCH SWITCH
INSPECTION
Disconnect the clutch switch connectors.
There should be continuity with the clutch lever applied,
and there should be no continuity when the clutch lever
is released.
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES 3P CONNECTOR

Disconnect the right handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch

position according to the table. 3P CONNECTOR
STARTER SWITCH
BAT ST
FREE
PUSH
COLOR B Y/R
18-5
MEMO
19. WIRING DIAGRAM
STANDARD AND CBS (CB HORNET 160R) 19-1
19-1
20. TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE DOES NOT START OR POOR PERFORMANCE AT HIGH SPEED20-5
IS HARD TO START 20-1
POOR HANDLING 20-5
ENGINE LACKS POWER 20-2
POOR PERFORMANCE AT LOW AND
IDLE SPEED 20-4
ENGINE DOES NOT START OR IS HARD TO START

1. Fuel Line Inspection
Check fuel flow to carburetor..
Does fuel reach the carburetor?
NO – Faulty fuel system.
2. Spark Plug Inspection
Remove and inspect the spark plug.
Is the spark plug wet?
YES – • Flooded carburetor
• Throttle valve open
• Dirty air cleaner
• Improperly adjusted pilot screw
3. Spark Test
Perform spark test.
Is there weak or no spark?
YES – • Faulty spark plug
• Loose or disconnected ignition system wires
• Broken or shorted spark plug wire
• Faulty ignition coil
• Faulty ignition pulse generator
• Faulty CDI
• Faulty regulator, rectifier Assembly
• Shorted battery wire
4. Engine Starting Condition
Start by following normal procedure.
Does the engine start then stops?
YES – • Improper choke operation
• Incorrectly adjusted carburetor
• Leaking carburetor insulator
• Improper ignition timing (Faulty CDI or ignition pulse generator)
• Contaminated fuel
5. Cylinder Compression Inspection
Test cylinder compression.
Is the compression low?
YES – • Valve clearance too small
20
• Valve stuck open
• Worn cylinder and piston rings
• Leaking/damaged cylinder head gasket
• Seized valve
• Improper valve timing
• Loose spark plug
• Carbon deposition on valves
20-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE LACKS POWER

1. Drive Train Inspection
Raise the wheels off the ground, and spin them by hand.
Does the wheel spin freely?
NO – • Brake dragging
• Bent axle
2. Tire Pressure Inspection
Check tire pressure.
Are the tire pressures low?
YES – • Faulty tire valve
• Punctured tire
3. Clutch Inspection
Accelerate rapidly from low to second.
Does the engine speed change accordingly when clutch is engaged?
NO – • Clutch slipping
• Improperly adjusted clutch lever free play
• Worn clutch discs/plates
• Warped clutch discs/plates
• Weak clutch spring
• Additive in engine oil
4. Engine Performance Inspection
Accelerate lightly.
Does the engine speed increase?
NO – • Fuel/air mixture too rich or lean
• Clogged air cleaner
• Restricted fuel flow
• Clogged muffler
• Clogged fuel fill cap breather
5. Engine Performance Inspection
Accelerate or run at high speed.
Is there knocking?
YES – • Worn piston and cylinder
• Use of poor quality fuel
• Excessive carbon build–up in combustion chamber
• Ignition timing too advance (Faulty CDI or ignition pulse generator)
• Lean fuel mixture
6. Ignition Timing Inspection
Check the ignition timing.
Is the ignition timing correct?
NO – • Faulty CDI
7. Engine Oil Inspection
Check the engine oil level and condition.
Is there correct level and good condition?
NO – • Oil level too high
• Oil level too low
• Contaminated oil
20-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
8. Spark Plug Inspection

Remove and inspect the spark plug.
Are the spark plug in good condition?
NO – • Plugs not serviced frequently enough
• Incorrect spark plug used
• Incorrect spark plug gap
9. Cylinder compression Inspection
Test the cylinder compression.
Is the compression low?
YES – • Valve clearance too small
• Valve stuck open
• Worn cylinder and piston rings
• Leaking/damaged cylinder head gasket
• Seized valve
• Improper valve timing
10. Carburetor Inspection
Check carburetor for clogging.
Is the carburetor for clogged?
YES – Carburetor not serviced frequently enough.
11. Lubrication Inspection
Remove the cylinder head cover, and inspect lubrication.
Is the valve train lubricated properly?
NO – • Clogged oil passage
• Clogged oil strainer
• Broken gear oil pump
• Faulty oil pump
20-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
POOR PERFORMANCE AT LOW AND IDLE SPEED

1. Pilot Screw Inspection
Check the pilot screw adjustment.
Is the adjustment correct?
NO – See page –19
2. Intake Air Leak Inspection
Check for leaking carburetor insulator.
Is there leaking?
YES – • Loose carburetor insulator bands
• Damaged insulator
3. Spark Test
Perform spark test.
Is there weak or no spark?
YES – • Faulty spark plug
• Fouled spark plug
• Loose or disconnected ignition system wires
• Broken or shorted spark plug wire
• Faulty ignition coil
• Faulty CDI
20-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
POOR PERFORMANCE AT HIGH SPEED

1. Fuel Line Inspection
Disconnect the fuel line at carburetor.
Does fuel flow freely?
NO – Faulty fuel system
2. Carburetor Inspection
Check the carburetor for clogging.
Is the carburetor clogged?
YES – Carburetor not serviced frequently enough
4. Valve Timing Inspection
Check the valve timing.
Is the valve timing correct?
NO – Cam sprocket not installed properly
5. Valve Spring Inspection
Check the valve springs.
Are the valve spring free length as specified?
NO – Faulty valve spring
YES – Not weak
POOR HANDLING
Steering is heavy
• Steering bearing adjusting nut too tight
• Damaged steering head bearings
Either wheel is wobbling
• Excessive wheel bearing play
• Bent rim
• Improperly installed wheel hub
• Excessively worn swingarm pivot bushings
• Bent frame
Motorcycle pulls to one side
• Front and rear wheels not aligned
• Faulty shock absorber
• Bent fork
• Bent swingarm
• Bent axle
• Bent frame
20-5
MEMO
21. INDEX
AIR CLEANER.................................................................3-6 CRANKCASE SEPARATION....................................... 11-4
AIR CLEANER HOUSING................................................5-3 CYLINDER COMPRESSION....................................... 7-4
AIR BLEEDING(CBS)....................................................14-3 CYLINDER HEAD COVER ......................................... 7-4
ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL..................................15-8 CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .. ...... 7-12
BALANCER....................................................................11-4 CYLINDER/PISTON..................................................... 8-2
BATTERY DIGITAL METER RESET PROCEDURE..................... 17-9
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM..............................15-5 DRIVE CHAIN ............................................................. 3-16
MAINTENANCE........................................................ 3-18 DRIVEN FLANGE ....................................................... 13-9
BEARING REPLACEMENT OF CRANKCASE............11-10 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................. 1-22
BEARING REPLACEMENT OF CRANKSHAFT...........11-12 ENGINE & FRAME TORQUE VALUES ...................... 1-10
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/ ENGINE IDLE SPEED................................................. 3-14
BRAKE FLUID FILLING/AIR BLEEDING(CBS).............14-4 ENGINE INSTALLATION.............................................. 6-4
BRAKE FLUID............................................................... 3-18 ENGINE OIL................................................................. 3-10
BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................14-27 ENGINE OIL CENTRIFUGAL FILTER.......................... 3-12
BRAKE PADS WEAR..................................................... 3-20 ENGINE OIL STRAINER SCREEN ............................. 4-2
BRAKE SYSTEM ..........................................................3-21 ENGINE REMOVAL..................................................... 6-2
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH(MAINTENANCE).................. 3-22 EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER......................................... 2-8
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH............................................... 17-12 FLYWHEEL.................................................................. 10-4
BRAKE/TAIL LIGHT...................................................... 17-3 FORK............................................................................ 12-14
BRAKE FLUID FILLING ................................................14-5 FRONT BRAKE(CBS) ................................................ 14-3
CAPACITIVE DISCHARGE IGNITION(CDI)................ 16-6 FRONT BRAKE PAD/DISC ........................................ 14-7
CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING.................................. 1-15 FRONT DISC BRAKE.................................................. 14-14
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER LIFTER.............................. 7-21 FRONT COWL DISASSEMBLY .................................. 2-2
CAM SHAFT HOLDER FRONT FENDER......................................................... 2-5
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL.................................. 7-10 FRONT WHEEL............................................................ 12-9
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.................................... 7-12 FRONT MASTER CYLINDER...................................... 14-9
CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION.......................... 7-19 FUEL GAUGE/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR........................ 17-14
CARBURETOR............................................................ 5-6 FUEL LINE................................................................... 3-4
CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION........................... 15-7 FUEL STRAINER......................................................... 5-22
CHOKE OPERATION................................................... 3-5 FUEL STRAINER SCREEN......................................... 3-4
CLUTCH....................................................................... 9-6 FUEL TANK.................................................................. 2-3
CLUTCH SYSTEM....................................................... 3-22 GEARSHIFT LINKAGE................................................ 9-12
CLUTCH SWITCH........................................................ 18-5 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................... 1-4
COMBINATION METER............................................... 17-5 HANDLEBAR............................................................... 12-4
COVER HEADLIGHT RR............................................. 2-2 RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES............................... 18-5
COMPONENT LOCATION HEADLIGHT................................................................. 17-2
ALTERNATOR ........................................................ 10-0 HEADLIGHT AIM.......................................................... 3-22
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................... 14-0 HORN........................................................................... 17-1
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE............................ 9-0 IGNITION COIL............................................................ 16-6
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/ IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION............................... 16-3
KICKSTARTER........................................................ 11-0 IGNITION TIMING........................................................ 16-5
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES..................................... 7-0 KICKSTARTER............................................................. 11-21
CYLINDER/PISTON ............................................... 8-0 LEFT CRANKCASE COVER........................................ 10-2
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................... 6-0 LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH ...................................... 17-11
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING........... 12-0 LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS ................................. 1-13
FUEL SYSTEM........................................................ 5-0 LIGHT/METER/SWITCHES......................................... 17-1
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION................................. 13-0 LEFT SIDE COVER...................................................... 2-3
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM............................ 15-0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE....................................... 3-3 21
ELECTRIC STARTER SYSTEM.............................. 18-0 MAINTENANCE........................................................... 3-1
IGNITION SYSTEM................................................. 16-0 MODEL IDENTIFICATION ........................................... 1-2
LIGHTS/METER/SWITCHES.................................. 17-0 NEUTRAL DIODE ....................................................... 18-4
LUBRICATION SYSTEM ........................................ 4-0 NEUTRAL SWITCH .......................................................17-12
CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY .......................................... 11-17 NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS ..................................... 3-24
CRANKCASE BREATHER........................................... 3-7 OIL PUMP.................................................................... 4-2
CRANKSHAFT............................................................. 11-8 PASSING RELAY......................................................... 17-16
21-1
INDEX
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR................................................ 9-14 SPEEDOMETER VS SENSOR...................................... 17-7

PILOT SCREW ADJUSTMENT...................................... 5-15 STANDARD TORQUE VALUES..................................... 1-10
REAR GRIP.................................................................... 2-6 STARTER CLUTCH....................................................... 10-6
REAR DRUM BRAKE..................................................... 14-30 STARTER MOTOR......................................................... 10-8
REAR FENDER.............................................................. 2-7 STARTER RELAY SWITCH........................................... 18-3
REAR COWL.................................................................. 2-7 STATOR/IGNITION PULSE GENERATOR.................... 10-16
REAR MASTER CYLINDER.......................................... 14-21 STEERING HEAD BEARINGS...................................... 3-25
REAR WHEEL................................................................ 13-4 STEERING STEM.......................................................... 12-22
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER ............................................ 15-9 STARTING ENRICHMENT(SE) VALVE......................... 5-5
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER ..................................... 9-3 SUSPENSION................................................................ 3-23
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES................................. 18-5 SWINGARM................................................................... 13-13
RIGHT SIDE COVER..................................................... 2-3 SYSTEM DIAGRAM
SARI GUARD................................................................. 2-8 BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM.............................. 15-0
SEAT.............................................................................. 2-3 IGNITION SYSTEM................................................... 16-0
SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM TACHOMETER............................................................... 17-8
FUEL SYSTEM.......................................................... 5-19 THROTTLE OPERATION............................................... 3-5
MAINTENANCE......................................................... 3-14 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR.................................. 16-7
SERVICE INFORMATION TRANSMISSION............................................................ 11-6
ALTERNATOR........................................................... 10-1 TROUBLESHOOTING
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM.............................. 15-1 BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM.............................. 15-2
BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................... 14-1 BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................... 14-2
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE.............................. 9-1 CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE.............................. 9-2
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER .... 11-1 CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER...... 11-2
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES....................................... 7-1 CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES....................................... 7-2
CYLINDER/PISTON.................................................. 8-1 CYLINDER/PISTON.................................................. 8-1
ELECTRIC STARTER SYSTEM................................ 18-1 ELECTRIC STARTER SYSTEM................................ 18-1
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................... 6-1 FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM........... 2-1
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM........... 2-1 FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING............. 12-3
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING............. 12-1 FUEL SYSTEM.......................................................... 5-2
FUEL SYSTEM.......................................................... 5-1 IGNITION SYSTEM................................................... 16-1
IGNITION SYSTEM................................................... 16-1 LUBRICATION SYSTEM........................................... 4-1
LIGHTS/METER/SWITCHES.................................... 17-1 REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION................................... 13-3
LUBRICATION SYSTEM........................................... 4-1 TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS................................................. 17-4
MAINTENANCE......................................................... 3-1 TURN SIGNAL RELAY................................................... 17-17
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION................................... 13-1 VALVE CLEARANCE..................................................... 3-8
SERVICE RULES........................................................... 1-1 WHEELS/TIRES............................................................. 3-24
SPECIFICATIONS
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH.......................... 1-6
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM.............................. 1-8
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE.............................. 1-6
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/KICKSTARTER...... 1-7
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES....................................... 1-5
CYLINDER/PISTON.................................................. 1-6
ELECTRIC STARTER................................................ 1-9
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING............. 1-7
FUEL SYSTEM.......................................................... 1-5
HYDRAULIC BRAKE................................................. 1-8
IGNITION SYSTEM................................................... 1-9
LIGHTS/METER/SWITCHES.................................... 1-9
LUBRICATION SYSTEM........................................... 1-5
REAR WHEEL/BRAKE/SUSPENSION..................... 1-8
SHOCK ABSORBER...................................................... 13-12
SIDE COVERS............................................................... 2-3
SIDE STAND.................................................................. 3-23
SPARK PLUG................................................................. 3-7
21-2
© Honda Motor Co.,Ltd.2015 Published by Honda Motorcycle & Scooter India Pvt. Ltd.
82K43P0

CB 160 Manual de Servicio PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CB 160 Manual de Servicio PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CB 160 Manual de Servicio PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SHOP MANUAL

For Your Customer’s Safety

Important Safety Precautions

• Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline, to clean parts.

and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or

• Instructions– How to service this vehicle correctly and

Replace the part(s) with new one(s) before assembly.

Use recommended engine oil, unless otherwise specified.

Use multi-purpose grease (Lithium based multi-purpose grease NLGI #2 or equivalent).

Use silicone grease.

Use Fork or Suspension Fluid.

FRAME SERIAL NUMBER

Engine Serial Number

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

Carburetor Serial Number

CARBURETOR IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

LUBRICATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

CYLINDER/PISTON SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

FRONT WHEEL/ SUSPENSION/STEERING SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

REAR WHEEL/ SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

BRAKE SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (in)

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRIC STARTER SPECIFICATION Unit: mm (in)

IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

STANDARD TORQUE VALUES

ENGINE & FRAME TORQUE VALUES

Embed to incomplete thread 90032–K38–901 90031–K38–901

LUBRICATION AND SEAL POINTS

Alternator wire grommet seating surface

CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING

THROTTLE CABLE FRONT BRAKE HOSE CLUTCH CABLE

CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE

CONNECT BOOT FOR:

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL

SELF STARTER SWITCH

LEFT HANDLEBAR SELF STARTER

SPARK PLUG WIRE FRONT BRAKE

CLUTCH CABLE SPARK PLUG WIRE

MAIN FUSE AND BATTERY POSITIVE (+)

NEUTRAL SWITCH WIRE

SECONDARY AIR SUCTION HOSE

CRANKCASE BREATHER PIPE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM

OXIDATION CATALYTIC CONVERTER

NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

FRONT COWL 6P BLACK GROMMET

FRONT COWL DISASSEMBLY

NUMBER LEFT LEFT TURN

COVER HEADLIGHT RR COVER HEADLIGHT RR WIRE HARNESS

RIGHT SIDE COVER GROMMET